mirror of
https://github.com/chylex/IntelliJ-IdeaVim.git
synced 2024-11-25 07:42:59 +01:00
6674 lines
351 KiB
Plaintext
6674 lines
351 KiB
Plaintext
*options.txt* For IdeaVim version @VERSION@. Last change: 2006 Dec 01
|
||
|
||
|
||
IdeaVim REFERENCE MANUAL by Rick Maddy
|
||
|
||
|
||
Options *options*
|
||
|
||
1. Setting options |set-option|
|
||
2. Automatically setting options |auto-setting|
|
||
3. Options summary |option-summary|
|
||
|
||
For an overview of options see help.txt |option-list|.
|
||
|
||
Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to
|
||
achieve special effects. These options come in three forms:
|
||
boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle*
|
||
number has a numeric value
|
||
string has a string value
|
||
|
||
==============================================================================
|
||
1. Setting options *set-option*
|
||
|
||
*:se* *:set*
|
||
:se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value.
|
||
|
||
:se[t] all Show all but terminal options.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
:se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the
|
||
key codes are not shown, because they are generated
|
||
internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal
|
||
codes in the GUI is not useful either...
|
||
|
||
*E518* *E519*
|
||
-->
|
||
:se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}.
|
||
|
||
:se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on.
|
||
Number option: show value.
|
||
String option: show value.
|
||
|
||
:se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.
|
||
|
||
:se[t] {option}! or
|
||
:se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value.
|
||
|
||
*:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim*
|
||
:se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the
|
||
current value of 'compatible'.
|
||
<!--
|
||
:se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value.
|
||
:se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
:se[t] all& Set all options, except terminal options, to their
|
||
default value. The values of 'term', 'lines' and
|
||
'columns' are not changed.
|
||
|
||
*E487* *E521*
|
||
:se[t] {option}={value} or
|
||
:se[t] {option}:{value}
|
||
Set string or number option to {value}.
|
||
*:set-args*
|
||
For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
|
||
hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0')
|
||
(hex and octal are only available for machines which
|
||
have the strtol() function).
|
||
<!--
|
||
The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
|
||
default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is
|
||
set). See |cmdline-completion|.
|
||
-->
|
||
White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and
|
||
will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value}
|
||
is not allowed.
|
||
See |option-backslash| for using white space and
|
||
backslashes in {value}.
|
||
|
||
:se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=*
|
||
Add the {value} to a number option, or append the
|
||
{value} to a string option. When the option is a
|
||
comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
|
||
value was empty.
|
||
If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags
|
||
are removed. Otherwise there is no check for doubled
|
||
values. You can avoid this by removing a value first.
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set guioptions-=T guioptions+=T
|
||
< Also see |:set-args| above.
|
||
|
||
:se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=*
|
||
Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend
|
||
the {value} to a string option. When the option is a
|
||
comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
|
||
value was empty.
|
||
Also see |:set-args| above.
|
||
|
||
:se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=*
|
||
Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove
|
||
the {value} from a string option, if it is there.
|
||
If the {value} is not found in a string option, there
|
||
is no error or warning. When the option is a comma
|
||
separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option
|
||
becomes empty.
|
||
When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be
|
||
exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags
|
||
one by one to avoid problems.
|
||
Also see |:set-args| above.
|
||
|
||
The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: >
|
||
:set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3
|
||
If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given
|
||
and the following arguments will be ignored.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*:set-verbose*
|
||
When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it
|
||
was last set. Example: >
|
||
:verbose set shiftwidth cindent?
|
||
shiftwidth=4
|
||
Last set from modeline
|
||
cindent
|
||
Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim
|
||
This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":set
|
||
all" or ":set" without an argument.
|
||
When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. There is only
|
||
one value for all local options with the same name. Thus the message applies
|
||
to the option name, not necessarily its value.
|
||
When the option was set while executing a function, user command or
|
||
autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported.
|
||
Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting
|
||
'compatible'.
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +eval feature}
|
||
|
||
*:set-termcap* *E522*
|
||
For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a termcap option. This will
|
||
override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If
|
||
the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: >
|
||
:set <t_#4>=^[Ot
|
||
This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For
|
||
example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: >
|
||
:set <M-b>=^[b
|
||
(the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it)
|
||
The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations.
|
||
|
||
The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put
|
||
at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of
|
||
"set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the
|
||
|more-prompt|.
|
||
|
||
-->
|
||
*option-backslash*
|
||
To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a
|
||
backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this
|
||
means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded
|
||
down).
|
||
A few examples: >
|
||
:set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags"
|
||
:set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file"
|
||
:set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file"
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To
|
||
include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the
|
||
'titlestring' option to "hi|there": >
|
||
:set titlestring=hi\|there
|
||
This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": >
|
||
:set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there
|
||
|
||
For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More
|
||
precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment
|
||
variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not
|
||
removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma,
|
||
etc.) is used like explained above.
|
||
There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": >
|
||
:set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path"
|
||
:set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path"
|
||
:set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!)
|
||
For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes
|
||
are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be
|
||
halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a
|
||
result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it.
|
||
|
||
*add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags*
|
||
*E539* *E550* *E551* *E552*
|
||
Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an
|
||
option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: >
|
||
:set guioptions+=a
|
||
Remove a flag from an option like this: >
|
||
:set guioptions-=a
|
||
This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'.
|
||
Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has
|
||
the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba"
|
||
doesn't appear.
|
||
|
||
*:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var*
|
||
Environment variables in most string options will be expanded. If the
|
||
environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable
|
||
name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name
|
||
are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may
|
||
follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is
|
||
appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: >
|
||
:set term=$TERM.new
|
||
:set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,.
|
||
When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set
|
||
opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Handling of local options *local-options*
|
||
|
||
Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer
|
||
has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value. This
|
||
allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set
|
||
'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another.
|
||
|
||
The following explains what happens to these local options in specific
|
||
situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses
|
||
the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user
|
||
expects is a bit complicated...
|
||
|
||
When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus
|
||
right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same.
|
||
|
||
When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since
|
||
the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer,
|
||
these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a
|
||
global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and
|
||
global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,
|
||
thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.
|
||
|
||
When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window
|
||
options are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this window, the
|
||
values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the window where
|
||
the buffer was edited last are used.
|
||
|
||
It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.
|
||
When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep
|
||
using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the
|
||
local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window
|
||
has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but
|
||
global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: >
|
||
:e one
|
||
:set list
|
||
:e two
|
||
Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list"
|
||
command you have also set the global value. >
|
||
:set nolist
|
||
:e one
|
||
:setlocal list
|
||
:e two
|
||
Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global
|
||
value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the
|
||
global value. Note that if you do this next: >
|
||
:e one
|
||
You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
|
||
"one". The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer.
|
||
|
||
*:setl* *:setlocal*
|
||
:setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the
|
||
current buffer or window. Not all options have a
|
||
local value. If the option does not have a local
|
||
value the global value is set.
|
||
With the "all" argument: display all local option's
|
||
local values.
|
||
Without argument: Display all local option's local
|
||
values which are different from the default.
|
||
When displaying a specific local option, show the
|
||
local value. For a global option the global value is
|
||
shown (but that might change in the future).
|
||
|
||
:setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value.
|
||
|
||
*:setg* *:setglobal*
|
||
:setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local
|
||
option without changing the local value.
|
||
When displaying an option, the global value is shown.
|
||
With the "all" argument: display all local option's
|
||
global values.
|
||
Without argument: display all local option's global
|
||
values which are different from the default.
|
||
|
||
For buffer-local and window-local options:
|
||
Command global value local value ~
|
||
:set option=value set set
|
||
:setlocal option=value - set
|
||
:setglobal option=value set -
|
||
:set option? - display
|
||
:setlocal option? - display
|
||
:setglobal option? display -
|
||
|
||
|
||
Global options with a local value *global-local*
|
||
|
||
Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers. For some
|
||
global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value. You can
|
||
set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer will then use the local
|
||
value, while other buffers continue using the global value.
|
||
|
||
For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global
|
||
'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: >
|
||
:set makeprg=gmake
|
||
then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set
|
||
the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too.
|
||
However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use
|
||
another 'makeprog' for it, without changing the value used for the C source
|
||
files. You use this command: >
|
||
:setlocal makeprg=perlmake
|
||
You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: >
|
||
:setlocal makeprg=
|
||
This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the
|
||
"<" flag, like this: >
|
||
:setlocal autoread<
|
||
Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the
|
||
local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters
|
||
when changing the global value later).
|
||
Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using
|
||
":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Setting the filetype
|
||
|
||
:setf[iletype] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype*
|
||
Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if
|
||
not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands.
|
||
This is short for: >
|
||
:if !did_filetype()
|
||
: setlocal filetype={filetype}
|
||
:endif
|
||
< This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid
|
||
setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different
|
||
settings and syntax files to be loaded.
|
||
|
||
:bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options*
|
||
:opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options.
|
||
Options are grouped by function.
|
||
Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the
|
||
short help to open a help window with more help for
|
||
the option.
|
||
Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the
|
||
"set" line to set the new value. For window and
|
||
buffer specific options, the last accessed window is
|
||
used to set the option value in, unless this is a help
|
||
window, in which case the window below help window is
|
||
used (skipping the option-window).
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+eval| or
|
||
|+autocmd| features}
|
||
|
||
*$HOME*
|
||
Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an
|
||
option and after a space or comma.
|
||
|
||
On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory
|
||
of user "user". Example: >
|
||
:set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,.
|
||
|
||
On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can
|
||
contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the
|
||
"gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on
|
||
the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
|
||
|
||
*:fix* *:fixdel*
|
||
:fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD':
|
||
't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~
|
||
CTRL-? CTRL-H
|
||
not CTRL-? CTRL-?
|
||
|
||
(CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex)
|
||
|
||
If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the
|
||
code for backspace is alright, you can put this in
|
||
your .vimrc: >
|
||
:fixdel
|
||
< This works no matter what the actual code for
|
||
backspace is.
|
||
|
||
If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can
|
||
use this: >
|
||
:if &term == "termname"
|
||
: set t_kb=^V<BS>
|
||
: fixdel
|
||
:endif
|
||
< Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key
|
||
(don't type four characters!). Replace "termname"
|
||
with your terminal name.
|
||
|
||
If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not
|
||
CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: >
|
||
:if &term == "termname"
|
||
: set t_kD=^V<Delete>
|
||
:endif
|
||
< Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key
|
||
(don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname"
|
||
with your terminal name.
|
||
|
||
*Linux-backspace*
|
||
Note about Linux: By default the backspace key
|
||
produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by
|
||
putting this line in your rc.local: >
|
||
echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys
|
||
<
|
||
*NetBSD-backspace*
|
||
Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce
|
||
the right code, try this: >
|
||
xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace"
|
||
< If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: >
|
||
keysym 22 = BackSpace
|
||
< You need to restart for this to take effect.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
==============================================================================
|
||
2. Automatically setting options *auto-setting*
|
||
|
||
Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives
|
||
to set options automatically for one or more files:
|
||
|
||
1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See
|
||
|initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions,
|
||
and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started.
|
||
<!--
|
||
You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and
|
||
|:mksession|.
|
||
2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed.
|
||
This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and
|
||
many other things. See |autocommand|.
|
||
3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a
|
||
number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for
|
||
modelines. This is explained here.
|
||
|
||
*modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520*
|
||
There are two forms of modelines. The first form:
|
||
[text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}
|
||
|
||
[text] any text or empty
|
||
{white} at least one white space (<Space> or <Tab>)
|
||
{vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
|
||
[white] optional white space
|
||
{options} a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':',
|
||
where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set"
|
||
command
|
||
|
||
Example: >
|
||
vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6
|
||
|
||
The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):
|
||
|
||
[text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]
|
||
|
||
[text] any text or empty
|
||
{white} at least one white space (<Space> or <Tab>)
|
||
{vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
|
||
[white] optional white space
|
||
se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space)
|
||
{options} a list of options, separated with white space, which is the
|
||
argument for a ":set" command
|
||
: a colon
|
||
[text] any text or empty
|
||
|
||
Example: >
|
||
/* vim: set ai tw=75: */
|
||
|
||
The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the chance
|
||
that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: "vi:" and
|
||
"vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version
|
||
3.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be
|
||
short for "example:").
|
||
|
||
*modeline-local*
|
||
The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the
|
||
buffer that contains the window. Although it's possible to set global options
|
||
from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and the files
|
||
in it set the same global option to a different value, the result depends on
|
||
which one was opened last.
|
||
|
||
*modeline-version*
|
||
If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version
|
||
number can be specified where "vim:" is used:
|
||
vim{vers}: version {vers} or later
|
||
vim<{vers}: version before {vers}
|
||
vim={vers}: version {vers}
|
||
vim>{vers}: version after {vers}
|
||
{vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).
|
||
For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later: >
|
||
/* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */
|
||
To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7: >
|
||
/* vim<570: set sw=4: */
|
||
There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".
|
||
|
||
|
||
The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.
|
||
If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.
|
||
|
||
Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line
|
||
like: >
|
||
/* vi:ts=4: */
|
||
will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: >
|
||
/* vi:set ts=4: */
|
||
|
||
If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.
|
||
|
||
If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The
|
||
backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: >
|
||
/* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */
|
||
This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the
|
||
':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".
|
||
|
||
No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody
|
||
might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines).
|
||
|
||
Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could
|
||
define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For
|
||
example: >
|
||
au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif
|
||
And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing
|
||
"VAR".
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
==============================================================================
|
||
3. Options summary *option-summary*
|
||
|
||
In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with
|
||
an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used.
|
||
|
||
In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option"
|
||
is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is
|
||
used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when
|
||
'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that
|
||
are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a
|
||
different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in
|
||
one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view
|
||
at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain
|
||
file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example
|
||
the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C
|
||
program.
|
||
|
||
global one option for all buffers and windows
|
||
local to window each window has its own copy of this option
|
||
local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option
|
||
|
||
When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window
|
||
are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the
|
||
buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the
|
||
'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for
|
||
buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is
|
||
first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer
|
||
is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not
|
||
present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the
|
||
buffer is created.
|
||
|
||
Not all options are supported in all versions. To test if option "foo" can be
|
||
used with ":set" use "exists('&foo')". This doesn't mean the value is
|
||
actually remembered and works. Some options are hidden, which means that you
|
||
can set them but the value is not remembered. To test if option "foo" is
|
||
really supported use "exists('+foo')".
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*E355*
|
||
A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph*
|
||
'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise)
|
||
global
|
||
The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The
|
||
routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode
|
||
(when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_)
|
||
outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26].
|
||
aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8.
|
||
See |rileft.txt|.
|
||
|
||
*'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'*
|
||
'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to
|
||
avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get
|
||
into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See
|
||
'revins'.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'*
|
||
'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles
|
||
the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set.
|
||
|
||
When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This
|
||
is useful to start the vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right
|
||
mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left
|
||
mode). See |farsi.txt|.
|
||
|
||
*'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'*
|
||
'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single")
|
||
global
|
||
Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding.
|
||
Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
|
||
Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
|
||
letters, Cyrillic letters).
|
||
|
||
There are currently two possible values:
|
||
"single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is
|
||
expected by most users.
|
||
"double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
|
||
|
||
There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
|
||
those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
|
||
legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro,
|
||
Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
|
||
therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also
|
||
true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
|
||
file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI vim or
|
||
vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
|
||
(or vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
|
||
this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
|
||
by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has
|
||
to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP
|
||
when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode
|
||
Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).
|
||
|
||
*'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noatuochdir'* *'noacd'*
|
||
'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
When on, vim will change its value for the current working directory
|
||
whenever you open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or
|
||
open/close a window. It will change to the directory containing the
|
||
file which was opened or selected. This option is provided for
|
||
backward compatibility with the vim released with Sun ONE Studio 4
|
||
Enterprise Edition.
|
||
|
||
*'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
|
||
'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to window
|
||
This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
|
||
Setting this option will:
|
||
- Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
|
||
- Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
|
||
- Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
|
||
between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
|
||
- Set the 'delcombine' option
|
||
Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text.
|
||
|
||
Resetting this option will:
|
||
- Reset the 'rightleft' option.
|
||
- Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
|
||
Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
|
||
option.
|
||
Also see |arabic.txt|.
|
||
|
||
*'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
|
||
*'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'*
|
||
'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
|
||
corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
|
||
take affect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
|
||
one which encompasses:
|
||
a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
|
||
within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
|
||
b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
|
||
c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
|
||
When disabled the character display reverts back to each character's
|
||
true stand-alone form.
|
||
Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
|
||
further details see |arabic.txt|.
|
||
|
||
*'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'*
|
||
'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
|
||
in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not
|
||
type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
|
||
<Esc> or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. When autoindent is on,
|
||
formatting (with the "gq" command or when you reach 'textwidth' in
|
||
Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first line.
|
||
When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
|
||
a different way.
|
||
The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
|
||
{small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing
|
||
<Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the
|
||
deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}.
|
||
|
||
*'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'*
|
||
'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off)
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
|
||
it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
|
||
When the file has been deleted this is not done. |timestamp|
|
||
If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
|
||
using the global value: >
|
||
:set autoread<
|
||
<
|
||
*'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'*
|
||
'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
|
||
:next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!,
|
||
:make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a CTRL-O, CTRL-I,
|
||
'{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file.
|
||
Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
|
||
'autowriteall' for that.
|
||
|
||
*'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'*
|
||
'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":quit",
|
||
":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window.
|
||
Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
|
||
been set.
|
||
|
||
*'background'* *'bg'*
|
||
'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light")
|
||
global
|
||
When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a
|
||
dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that
|
||
look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal.
|
||
Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used.
|
||
This will not always be correct.
|
||
Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim
|
||
what the background color looks like. For changing the background
|
||
color, see |:hi-normal|.
|
||
|
||
When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for
|
||
the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not
|
||
change.
|
||
When a color scheme is loaded (the "colors_name" variable is set)
|
||
setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If
|
||
the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
|
||
However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
|
||
be undone. First delete the "colors_name" variable when needed.
|
||
|
||
When setting 'background' to the default value with: >
|
||
:set background&
|
||
< Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly,
|
||
in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.
|
||
|
||
When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be
|
||
"light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects
|
||
that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to
|
||
"dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read
|
||
(because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background
|
||
color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by
|
||
putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value
|
||
of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on").
|
||
Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly
|
||
depending on the terminal name. Example: >
|
||
:if &term == "pcterm"
|
||
: set background=dark
|
||
:endif
|
||
< When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups
|
||
will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
|
||
the setting of the 'background' option.
|
||
This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file
|
||
to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this
|
||
option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be
|
||
done with ":syntax on".
|
||
|
||
*'backspace'* *'bs'*
|
||
'backspace' 'bs' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
|
||
mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows
|
||
a way to backspace over something:
|
||
value effect ~
|
||
indent allow backspacing over autoindent
|
||
eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
|
||
start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
|
||
stop once at the start of insert.
|
||
|
||
When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used.
|
||
|
||
For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier:
|
||
value effect ~
|
||
0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible)
|
||
1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol"
|
||
2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start"
|
||
|
||
See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'*
|
||
'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the
|
||
file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the
|
||
backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
|
||
written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
|
||
the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
|
||
options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the
|
||
|backup-table| for more explanations.
|
||
When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
|
||
When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
|
||
oldest version of a file.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'backupcopy'* *'bkc'*
|
||
'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto")
|
||
global
|
||
When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
|
||
done:
|
||
"yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
|
||
"no" rename the file and write a new one
|
||
"auto" one of the previous, what works best
|
||
|
||
Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
|
||
- Takes extra time to copy the file.
|
||
+ When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
|
||
has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
|
||
- When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
|
||
not of the real file.
|
||
|
||
Renaming the file and writing a new one:
|
||
+ It's fast.
|
||
- Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
|
||
file.
|
||
- When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.
|
||
|
||
The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file
|
||
is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and
|
||
and the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected,
|
||
a copy will be made.
|
||
*crontab*
|
||
One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
|
||
that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
|
||
the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
|
||
backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an
|
||
example.
|
||
|
||
When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
|
||
with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and
|
||
symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file
|
||
however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The
|
||
group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this
|
||
fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
|
||
others.
|
||
|
||
When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has
|
||
the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
|
||
is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
|
||
link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't
|
||
rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly
|
||
written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
|
||
the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will
|
||
again not rename the file.
|
||
|
||
*'backupdir'* *'bdir'*
|
||
'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
|
||
for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:/tmp,c:/temp"
|
||
for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/")
|
||
global
|
||
List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
|
||
- The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
|
||
where this is possible.
|
||
- Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
|
||
impossible!). Writing may fail because of this.
|
||
- A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
|
||
as the edited file.
|
||
- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et.al.) means to
|
||
put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The
|
||
leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
|
||
("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
|
||
- Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
|
||
of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
|
||
name, precede it with a backslash.
|
||
- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
|
||
- A directory name may end in an '/'.
|
||
- Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
||
- Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
|
||
get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
|
||
:set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
|
||
< - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
|
||
of the option is removed.
|
||
See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
|
||
If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >
|
||
:set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
|
||
< You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
|
||
home directory for this to work properly.
|
||
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
||
directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
||
uses another default.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589*
|
||
'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_")
|
||
global
|
||
String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
|
||
backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
|
||
accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might
|
||
prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
|
||
".bak" that you want to keep.
|
||
|
||
*'backupskip'* *'bsk'*
|
||
'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
|
||
feature}
|
||
A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the
|
||
name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both
|
||
the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
|
||
The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
|
||
Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
|
||
When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
|
||
default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.
|
||
|
||
*'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'*
|
||
'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|.
|
||
|
||
*'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'*
|
||
'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
|
||
and |+sun_workshop| or |+netbeans_intg| features}
|
||
Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality.
|
||
|
||
*'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
|
||
'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also
|
||
use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few
|
||
options will be changed (also when it already was on):
|
||
'textwidth' will be set to 0
|
||
'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
|
||
'modeline' will be off
|
||
'expandtab' will be off
|
||
Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
|
||
file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
|
||
separates lines).
|
||
The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
|
||
file is read without conversion.
|
||
NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
|
||
on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
|
||
'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set
|
||
'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
|
||
The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
|
||
'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of
|
||
saved option values.
|
||
When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
|
||
there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
|
||
the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See
|
||
the 'endofline' option.
|
||
|
||
*'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'*
|
||
'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
When on the bios is called to obtain a keyboard character. This works
|
||
better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console. When using a
|
||
terminal over a serial port reset this option.
|
||
Also see |'conskey'|.
|
||
|
||
*'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
|
||
'bomb' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
|
||
Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
|
||
- this option is on
|
||
- the 'binary' option is off
|
||
- 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
|
||
endian variants.
|
||
Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
|
||
Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it
|
||
causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
|
||
appear halfway the file.
|
||
When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
|
||
check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
|
||
Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
|
||
don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM
|
||
will be restored when writing the file.
|
||
|
||
*'breakat'* *'brk'*
|
||
'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
|
||
feature}
|
||
This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
|
||
break if 'linebreak' is on.
|
||
|
||
*'browsedir'* *'bsdir'*
|
||
'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default for "last")
|
||
global
|
||
Which directory to use for the file browser:
|
||
last Use same directory as with last file browser.
|
||
buffer Use the directory of the related buffer.
|
||
current Use the current directory.
|
||
{path} Use the specified directory
|
||
|
||
*'bufhidden'* *'bh'*
|
||
'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
||
feature}
|
||
This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
|
||
displayed in a window:
|
||
<empty> follow the global 'hidden' option
|
||
hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden'
|
||
is not set
|
||
unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using
|
||
|:hide|
|
||
delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when
|
||
'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
|
||
|:bdelete|
|
||
wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when
|
||
'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
|
||
|:bwipeout|
|
||
|
||
This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
|
||
special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
|
||
|
||
*'buflisted'* *'bl'* *E85*
|
||
'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If
|
||
it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
|
||
This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
|
||
a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
|
||
But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".
|
||
|
||
*'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382*
|
||
'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
||
feature}
|
||
The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
|
||
<empty> normal buffer
|
||
nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be
|
||
written
|
||
nowrite buffer which will not be written
|
||
quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow|
|
||
help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this
|
||
manually)
|
||
|
||
This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
|
||
specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
|
||
|
||
Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
|
||
|
||
A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list. This value is
|
||
set by the |:cwindow| command and you are not supposed to change it.
|
||
|
||
"nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
|
||
both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
|
||
work (":w filename" does work though).
|
||
both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|.
|
||
There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
|
||
example when you quit Vim.
|
||
both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory
|
||
(when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
|
||
file).
|
||
nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
|
||
file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
|
||
command.
|
||
|
||
*'casemap'* *'cmp'*
|
||
'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain
|
||
these words, separated by a comma:
|
||
internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current
|
||
locale does not change the case mapping. This only
|
||
matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding. When
|
||
"internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower()
|
||
system library functions are used when available.
|
||
keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
|
||
case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
|
||
This probably only matters for Turkish.
|
||
|
||
*'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346*
|
||
'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the
|
||
|+file_in_path| feature}
|
||
This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
|
||
|:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched
|
||
for has a relative path (not starting with "/", "./" or "../").
|
||
The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
|
||
|'path'|. Also see |file-searching|.
|
||
The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
|
||
in the current directory first.
|
||
If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
|
||
a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
|
||
override it: >
|
||
:let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
|
||
< This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons
|
||
(parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).
|
||
|
||
*'cedit'*
|
||
'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
|
||
feature}
|
||
The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
|
||
The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off.
|
||
Only non-printable keys are allowed.
|
||
The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
|
||
type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: >
|
||
:set cedit=<C-Y>
|
||
:set cedit=<Esc>
|
||
< |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
|
||
See |cmdwin|.
|
||
|
||
*'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513*
|
||
'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
||
feature and the |+eval| feature}
|
||
|
||
An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is
|
||
evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
|
||
different encoding from what is desired.
|
||
'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
|
||
supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is
|
||
preferred, because it is much faster.
|
||
'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
|
||
file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first.
|
||
The expression must return zero or an empty string for success,
|
||
non-zero for failure.
|
||
The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'.
|
||
Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
|
||
used.
|
||
Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
|
||
is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
|
||
'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c'
|
||
flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion.
|
||
Example: >
|
||
set charconvert=CharConvert()
|
||
fun CharConvert()
|
||
system("recode "
|
||
\ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to
|
||
\ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out)
|
||
return v:shell_error
|
||
endfun
|
||
< The related Vim variables are:
|
||
v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding
|
||
v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding
|
||
v:fname_in name of the input file
|
||
v:fname_out name of the output file
|
||
Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.
|
||
Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different
|
||
from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4.
|
||
Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want
|
||
to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care
|
||
of this.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'*
|
||
'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Enables automatic C program indenting See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
|
||
that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
|
||
preferred indent style.
|
||
If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
|
||
If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
|
||
the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
|
||
external program.
|
||
See |C-indenting|.
|
||
When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
|
||
option or 'indentexpr'.
|
||
This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'cinkeys'* *'cink'*
|
||
'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
||
feature}
|
||
A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
|
||
the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
|
||
empty.
|
||
For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
|
||
See |C-indenting|.
|
||
|
||
*'cinoptions'* *'cino'*
|
||
'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
||
feature}
|
||
The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
|
||
program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
|
||
|C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.
|
||
|
||
|
||
*'cinwords'* *'cinw'*
|
||
'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without both the
|
||
|+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features}
|
||
These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
|
||
'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at
|
||
an appropriate place (inside {}).
|
||
Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't
|
||
matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
|
||
"if,If,IF".
|
||
|
||
*'clipboard'* *'cb'*
|
||
'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux"
|
||
for X-windows, "" otherwise)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard|
|
||
feature is included}
|
||
This option is a list of comma separated names.
|
||
These names are recognized:
|
||
|
||
unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
|
||
for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
|
||
would normally go to the unnamed register. When a
|
||
register is explicitly specified, it will always be
|
||
used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
|
||
or not. The clipboard register can always be
|
||
explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see
|
||
|gui-clipboard|.
|
||
|
||
autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
|
||
then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
|
||
area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
|
||
windowing system's global selection or put the
|
||
selected text on the clipboard used by the selection
|
||
register "*. See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for
|
||
details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in
|
||
'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this
|
||
"autoselect" flag is used.
|
||
Also applies to the modeless selection.
|
||
|
||
autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
|
||
only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.
|
||
|
||
exclude:{pattern}
|
||
Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
|
||
the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no
|
||
connection will be made to the X server. This is
|
||
useful in this situation:
|
||
- Running Vim in a console.
|
||
- $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another
|
||
display.
|
||
- You do not want to connect to the X server in the
|
||
console, but do want this in a terminal emulator.
|
||
To never connect to the X server use: >
|
||
exclude:.*
|
||
< This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument.
|
||
Note that when there is no connection to the X server
|
||
the window title won't be restored and the clipboard
|
||
cannot be accessed.
|
||
The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is
|
||
interpreted as if 'magic' was on.
|
||
The rest of the option value will be used for
|
||
{pattern}, this must be the last entry.
|
||
|
||
*'cmdheight'* *'ch'*
|
||
'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding
|
||
|hit-enter| prompts.
|
||
|
||
*'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'*
|
||
'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
|
||
|
||
*'columns'* *'co'* *E594*
|
||
'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal
|
||
initialization and does not have to be set by hand.
|
||
When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
|
||
option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
|
||
to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
|
||
When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
|
||
number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.
|
||
|
||
*'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525*
|
||
'comments' 'com' string (default
|
||
"s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+comments|
|
||
feature}
|
||
A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See
|
||
|format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
|
||
insert a space.
|
||
|
||
*'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537*
|
||
'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
|
||
comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see
|
||
|fold-marker|.
|
||
|
||
*'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
|
||
'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a .vimrc file is found)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
|
||
make Vim behave in a more useful way.
|
||
This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset,
|
||
other options are also changed as a side effect. CAREFUL: Setting or
|
||
resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings
|
||
are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc. If you
|
||
set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the
|
||
very start.
|
||
By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the
|
||
options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim
|
||
just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'
|
||
option.
|
||
When a ".vimrc" file is found while Vim is starting up, this option is
|
||
switched off, and all options that have not been modified will be set
|
||
to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means that when a ".vimrc"
|
||
file exists, Vim will use the Vim defaults, otherwise it will use the
|
||
Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc
|
||
file). Also see |compatible-default|.
|
||
You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with
|
||
"-N". See |-C| and |-N|.
|
||
Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options
|
||
that have a different Vi and Vim default value. See the options
|
||
marked with a '+' below. Other options are not modified.
|
||
At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set
|
||
or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible. See the table
|
||
below. This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible
|
||
editing.
|
||
See also 'cpoptions'.
|
||
|
||
option + set value effect ~
|
||
|
||
'allowrevins' off no CTRL-_ command
|
||
'backupcopy' Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy
|
||
others: "auto" copy or rename backup file
|
||
'backspace' "" normal backspace
|
||
'backup' off no backup file
|
||
'cindent' off no C code indentation
|
||
'cedit' + "" no key to open the |cmdwin|
|
||
'cpoptions' + (all flags) Vi-compatible flags
|
||
'cscopetag' off don't use cscope for ":tag"
|
||
'cscopetagorder' 0 see |cscopetagorder|
|
||
'cscopeverbose' off see |cscopeverbose|
|
||
'digraph' off no digraphs
|
||
'esckeys' + off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode
|
||
'expandtab' off tabs not expanded to spaces
|
||
'fileformats' + "" no automatic file format detection,
|
||
"dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2
|
||
'formatoptions' + "vt" Vi compatible formatting
|
||
'gdefault' off no default 'g' flag for ":s"
|
||
'history' + 0 no commandline history
|
||
'hkmap' off no Hebrew keyboard mapping
|
||
'hkmapp' off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping
|
||
'hlsearch' off no highlighting of search matches
|
||
'incsearch' off no incremental searching
|
||
'indentexpr' "" no indenting by expression
|
||
'insertmode' off do not start in Insert mode
|
||
'iskeyword' + "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric
|
||
characters and '_'
|
||
'joinspaces' on insert 2 spaces after period
|
||
'modeline' + off no modelines
|
||
'more' + off no pauses in listings
|
||
'revins' off no reverse insert
|
||
'ruler' off no ruler
|
||
'scrolljump' 1 no jump scroll
|
||
'scrolloff' 0 no scroll offset
|
||
'shiftround' off indent not rounded to shiftwidth
|
||
'shortmess' + "" no shortening of messages
|
||
'showcmd' + off command characters not shown
|
||
'showmode' + off current mode not shown
|
||
'smartcase' off no automatic ignore case switch
|
||
'smartindent' off no smart indentation
|
||
'smarttab' off no smart tab size
|
||
'softtabstop' 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions
|
||
'startofline' on goto startofline with some commands
|
||
'tagrelative' + off tag file names are not relative
|
||
'textauto' + off no automatic textmode detection
|
||
'textwidth' 0 no automatic line wrap
|
||
'tildeop' off tilde is not an operator
|
||
'ttimeout' off no terminal timeout
|
||
'whichwrap' + "" left-right movements don't wrap
|
||
'wildchar' + CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab>
|
||
use CTRL-E for cmdline completion
|
||
'writebackup' on or off depends on +writebackup feature
|
||
|
||
*'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535*
|
||
'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works
|
||
when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line
|
||
completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion
|
||
and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags:
|
||
. scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
|
||
w scan buffers from other windows
|
||
b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
|
||
u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
|
||
U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
|
||
k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
|
||
k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given,
|
||
patterns are valid too. For example: >
|
||
:set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
|
||
< s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
|
||
s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
|
||
are valid too.
|
||
i scan current and included files
|
||
d scan current and included files for defined name or macro
|
||
|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
|
||
] tag completion
|
||
t same as "]"
|
||
|
||
Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
|
||
not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
|
||
(gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
|
||
whole-line completion.
|
||
|
||
The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan:
|
||
1. the current buffer
|
||
2. buffers in other windows
|
||
3. other loaded buffers
|
||
4. unloaded buffers
|
||
5. tags
|
||
6. included files
|
||
|
||
As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'-
|
||
based expansion (eg dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns
|
||
|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions)
|
||
|
||
*'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
|
||
'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
|
||
fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
|
||
instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current
|
||
file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
|
||
If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
|
||
command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
|
||
command.
|
||
Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.
|
||
|
||
*'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'*
|
||
'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.
|
||
This should work in most cases. Also see |'bioskey'|. Together,
|
||
three methods of console input are available:
|
||
'conskey' 'bioskey' action ~
|
||
on on or off direct console input
|
||
off on BIOS
|
||
off off STDIN
|
||
|
||
*'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
|
||
'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
|
||
new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
|
||
tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled,
|
||
in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the
|
||
new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
|
||
existing line. If the new indent is greater than on the existing
|
||
line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
|
||
NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
Also see 'preserveindent'.
|
||
|
||
*'cpoptions'* *'cpo'*
|
||
'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs",
|
||
Vi default: all flags)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present
|
||
this indicates vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where
|
||
not being vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
|
||
'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
|
||
Commas can be added for readability.
|
||
To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
|
||
"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
contains behavior ~
|
||
*cpo-a*
|
||
a When included, a ":read" command with a file name
|
||
argument will set the alternate file name for the
|
||
current window.
|
||
*cpo-A*
|
||
A When included, a ":write" command with a file name
|
||
argument will set the alternate file name for the
|
||
current window.
|
||
*cpo-b*
|
||
b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
|
||
the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping,
|
||
the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
|
||
command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
|
||
include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all
|
||
mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
|
||
See also |map_bar|.
|
||
*cpo-B*
|
||
B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
|
||
abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands.
|
||
Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a
|
||
CTRL-V. For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>"
|
||
results in X being mapped to:
|
||
'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>)
|
||
'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters)
|
||
('<' excluded in both cases)
|
||
*cpo-c*
|
||
c Searching continues at the end of any match at the
|
||
cursor position. When not present searching continues
|
||
one character from the cursor position. With 'c'
|
||
"abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
|
||
"/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
|
||
*cpo-C*
|
||
C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
|
||
backslash. See |line-continuation|.
|
||
*cpo-d*
|
||
d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
|
||
the tags file relative to the current file, but the
|
||
tags file in the current directory.
|
||
*cpo-D*
|
||
D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
|
||
commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
|
||
|t|.
|
||
*cpo-e*
|
||
e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
|
||
<CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
|
||
linewise. If this flag is not present, the register
|
||
is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
|
||
<CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
|
||
and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
|
||
*cpo-E*
|
||
E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
|
||
"gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when
|
||
at least one character is to be operate on. Example:
|
||
This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
|
||
*cpo-f*
|
||
f When included, a ":read" command with a file name
|
||
argument will set the file name for the current buffer,
|
||
if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet.
|
||
*cpo-F*
|
||
F When included, a ":write" command with a file name
|
||
argument will set the file name for the current
|
||
buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
|
||
yet.
|
||
*cpo-g*
|
||
g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument.
|
||
*cpo-i*
|
||
i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
|
||
leave it modified.
|
||
*cpo-j*
|
||
j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.',
|
||
not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'.
|
||
*cpo-J*
|
||
J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
|
||
the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as
|
||
white space.
|
||
*cpo-k*
|
||
k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in
|
||
mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu
|
||
commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[
|
||
is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X
|
||
being mapped to:
|
||
'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters)
|
||
'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code)
|
||
Also see the '<' flag below.
|
||
*cpo-K*
|
||
K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
|
||
halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when
|
||
only part of the second <F1> has been read. It
|
||
enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>.
|
||
*cpo-l*
|
||
l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
|
||
literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]|
|
||
'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
|
||
'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab>
|
||
*cpo-L*
|
||
L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
|
||
'textwidth' and Virtual Replace mode (see |gR|) count
|
||
a <Tab> as two characters, instead of the normal
|
||
behavior of a <Tab>.
|
||
*cpo-m*
|
||
m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
|
||
second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half
|
||
a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'|
|
||
*cpo-M*
|
||
M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
|
||
account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
|
||
parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores
|
||
backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
|
||
*cpo-n*
|
||
n When included, the column used for 'number' will also
|
||
be used for text of wrapped lines.
|
||
*cpo-o*
|
||
o Line offset to search command is not remembered for
|
||
next search.
|
||
*cpo-O*
|
||
O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
|
||
when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a
|
||
protection against a file unexpectedly created by
|
||
someone else. Vi didn't complain about this.
|
||
*cpo-p*
|
||
p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a
|
||
slightly better algorithm is used.
|
||
*cpo-r*
|
||
r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
|
||
command, instead of the actually used search string.
|
||
*cpo-s*
|
||
s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
|
||
first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
|
||
And it is the default. If not present the options are
|
||
set when the buffer is created.
|
||
*cpo-S*
|
||
S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
|
||
(except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
|
||
'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
|
||
The options are set to the values in the current
|
||
buffer. When you change an option and go to another
|
||
buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the
|
||
buffer options global to all buffers.
|
||
|
||
's' 'S' copy buffer options
|
||
no no when buffer created
|
||
yes no when buffer first entered (default)
|
||
X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
|
||
*cpo-t*
|
||
t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
|
||
"n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
|
||
the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
|
||
last used search pattern.
|
||
*cpo-u*
|
||
u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|.
|
||
*cpo-v*
|
||
v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
|
||
Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are
|
||
erased from the screen right away. With this flag the
|
||
screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
|
||
characters.
|
||
*cpo-w*
|
||
w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one
|
||
character and not all blanks until the start of the
|
||
next word.
|
||
*cpo-W*
|
||
W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!"
|
||
overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
|
||
*cpo-x*
|
||
x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
|
||
The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
|
||
because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>|
|
||
*cpo-y*
|
||
y A yank command can be redone with ".".
|
||
*cpo-!*
|
||
! When redoing a filter command, use the last used
|
||
external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last
|
||
used -filter- command is used.
|
||
*cpo-$*
|
||
$ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
|
||
line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
|
||
The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
|
||
new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any
|
||
command that moves the cursor from the insertion
|
||
point.
|
||
*cpo-%*
|
||
% Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
|
||
Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
|
||
Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
|
||
Parens inside single and double quotes are also
|
||
counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
|
||
disturb the matching. For example, in a line like
|
||
"if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
|
||
match the last one. When this flag is not included,
|
||
parens inside single and double quotes are treated
|
||
specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes,
|
||
everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a
|
||
paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
|
||
there is one). This works very well for C programs.
|
||
*cpo-star*
|
||
* Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included,
|
||
":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area.
|
||
*cpo-<*
|
||
< Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>|
|
||
form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of
|
||
menu commands. For example, the command
|
||
":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to:
|
||
'<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters)
|
||
'<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>)
|
||
Also see the 'k' flag above.
|
||
|
||
*'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'*
|
||
'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0)
|
||
global
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags.
|
||
See |cscopepathcomp|.
|
||
|
||
*'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'*
|
||
'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope")
|
||
global
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'*
|
||
'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
||
or |+quickfix| features}
|
||
|
||
Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results.
|
||
See |cscopequickfix|.
|
||
|
||
*'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'*
|
||
'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'*
|
||
'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0)
|
||
global
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See
|
||
|cscopetagorder|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'*
|
||
*'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'*
|
||
'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'debug'*
|
||
'debug' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When set to "msg", error messages that would otherwise be omitted will
|
||
be given anyway. This is useful when debugging 'foldexpr' or
|
||
'indentexpr'.
|
||
|
||
*'define'* *'def'*
|
||
'define' 'def' string (default "^#\s*define")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search
|
||
pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the
|
||
commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is
|
||
used to recognize the defined name after the match:
|
||
{match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
|
||
See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
|
||
or backslash.
|
||
The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be
|
||
useful, to include const type declarations: >
|
||
^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
|
||
< When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
|
||
|
||
*'delcombine'* *'deco'*
|
||
'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
||
feature}
|
||
If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
|
||
"x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the
|
||
default) the character along with its combining characters are
|
||
deleted.
|
||
Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"!
|
||
|
||
This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
|
||
may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
|
||
to remove only the combining ones.
|
||
|
||
*'dictionary'* *'dict'*
|
||
'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
|
||
for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should
|
||
contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several
|
||
words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
|
||
preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes.
|
||
To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
|
||
after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
|
||
name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
|
||
Where to find a list of words?
|
||
- On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words".
|
||
- In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory.
|
||
- In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection.
|
||
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
||
directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
||
uses another default.
|
||
Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'diff'* *'nodiff'*
|
||
'diff' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
|
||
between files. See |vimdiff|.
|
||
|
||
*'dex'* *'diffexpr'*
|
||
'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two
|
||
versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'dip'* *'diffopt'*
|
||
'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items.
|
||
All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma.
|
||
|
||
filler Show filler lines, to keep the text
|
||
synchronized with a window that has inserted
|
||
lines at the same position. Mostly useful
|
||
when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
|
||
is set.
|
||
|
||
context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change
|
||
and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
|
||
When omitted a context of six lines is used.
|
||
See |fold-diff|.
|
||
|
||
icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A"
|
||
are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag
|
||
to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.
|
||
|
||
iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds
|
||
the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
|
||
'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation
|
||
of the "diff" command for what this does
|
||
exactly. It should ignore adding trailing
|
||
white space, but not leading white space.
|
||
|
||
Examples: >
|
||
|
||
:set diffopt=filler,context:4
|
||
:set diffopt=
|
||
:set diffopt=filler
|
||
<
|
||
-->
|
||
*'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'*
|
||
'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
|
||
{char2}. See |digraphs|.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'directory'* *'dir'*
|
||
'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
|
||
for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:\tmp,c:\temp"
|
||
for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp")
|
||
global
|
||
List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.
|
||
- The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
|
||
possible.
|
||
- Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
|
||
impossible!).
|
||
- A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
|
||
the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
|
||
it doesn't show in a directory listing.
|
||
- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et.al.) means to
|
||
put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading
|
||
"." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
|
||
- For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators, the
|
||
swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
|
||
with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. This will
|
||
ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
|
||
- Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
|
||
of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
|
||
name, precede it with a backslash.
|
||
- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
|
||
- A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
|
||
- Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
||
- Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
|
||
get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
|
||
:set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
|
||
< - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
|
||
of the option is removed.
|
||
Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing
|
||
the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is
|
||
discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file.
|
||
"/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better
|
||
choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap
|
||
files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your
|
||
home directory is tried first.
|
||
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
||
directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
||
uses another default.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
{Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"}
|
||
|
||
*'display'* *'dy'*
|
||
'display' 'dy' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of
|
||
flags:
|
||
lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line
|
||
in a window will be displayed. When not included, a
|
||
last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
|
||
uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
|
||
instead of using ^C and ~C.
|
||
|
||
*'eadirection'* *'ead'*
|
||
'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
||
feature}
|
||
Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
|
||
ver vertically, width of windows is not affected
|
||
hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected
|
||
both width and height of windows is affected
|
||
|
||
*'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'*
|
||
'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be
|
||
toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See
|
||
also 'gdefault' option.
|
||
Switching this option on is discouraged!
|
||
|
||
*'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543*
|
||
'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)
|
||
global
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in
|
||
the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the
|
||
viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work
|
||
with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values.
|
||
|
||
NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the
|
||
existing text in Vim. It may cause multi-byte text to become invalid.
|
||
It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim
|
||
starts up. See |multibyte|.
|
||
|
||
NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to
|
||
"utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of
|
||
'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and
|
||
avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made
|
||
the default to prevent different behaviour of the GUI and terminal
|
||
versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files
|
||
without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty).
|
||
|
||
The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'.
|
||
This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with
|
||
iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.
|
||
|
||
Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will
|
||
be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If
|
||
'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be
|
||
set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|.
|
||
|
||
When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand
|
||
event so that you can set up fonts if necessary.
|
||
|
||
When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
|
||
you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated
|
||
to '-' signs.
|
||
When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name.
|
||
For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes
|
||
"iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8".
|
||
|
||
Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected.
|
||
This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the
|
||
actual characterset is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and
|
||
'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using
|
||
utf-8.
|
||
|
||
When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8.
|
||
You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the
|
||
|viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus
|
||
setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has
|
||
effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty.
|
||
|
||
When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was
|
||
not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.
|
||
|
||
*'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'*
|
||
'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
|
||
is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file. This
|
||
option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless
|
||
the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in
|
||
which case it is reset. Normally you don't have to set or reset this
|
||
option. When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the
|
||
file. When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a
|
||
<EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file
|
||
the situation from the original file can be kept. But you can change
|
||
it if you want to.
|
||
|
||
*'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'*
|
||
'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
|
||
splitting or closing a window. When off, splitting a window will
|
||
reduce the size of the current window and leave the other windows the
|
||
same. When closing a window the extra lines are given to the window
|
||
next to it (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
|
||
When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
|
||
is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The
|
||
'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
|
||
Changing the height of a window can be avoided by setting
|
||
'winfixheight'.
|
||
|
||
*'equalprg'* *'ep'*
|
||
'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty
|
||
the internal formatting functions are used ('lisp', 'cindent' or
|
||
'indentexpr').
|
||
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash|
|
||
about including spaces and backslashes.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'*
|
||
'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only
|
||
makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
|
||
for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
|
||
mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep,
|
||
screen flash or do nothing.
|
||
|
||
*'errorfile'* *'ef'*
|
||
'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err",
|
||
others: "errors.err")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
|
||
When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
|
||
following argument. See |-q|.
|
||
NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that.
|
||
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
||
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'errorformat'* *'efm'*
|
||
'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long)
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
|
||
(see |errorformat|).
|
||
|
||
*'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'*
|
||
'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert
|
||
mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be
|
||
used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of
|
||
this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of
|
||
after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to
|
||
try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that
|
||
when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys
|
||
won't work by default.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'eventignore'* *'ei'*
|
||
'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
|
||
feature}
|
||
A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
|
||
When set to "all", all autocommand events are ignored, autocommands
|
||
will not be executed.
|
||
Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: >
|
||
:set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
|
||
<
|
||
*'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'*
|
||
'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
|
||
<Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
|
||
when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
|
||
on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'*
|
||
'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current
|
||
directory. If you switch this option on you should also consider
|
||
setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|). Using a local
|
||
.exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care!
|
||
also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213*
|
||
'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer.
|
||
When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be
|
||
done when reading and writing the file.
|
||
When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be
|
||
used (no conversion when reading or writing a file).
|
||
WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
|
||
'encoding' is "utf-8" conversion is most likely done in a way
|
||
that the reverse conversion results in the same text. When
|
||
'encoding' is not "utf-8" some characters may be lost!
|
||
See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be
|
||
specified that can be handled by the converter, see
|
||
|mbyte-conversion|.
|
||
When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
|
||
To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
|
||
'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.
|
||
Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
|
||
When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
|
||
you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are
|
||
replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for
|
||
'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example
|
||
"ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".
|
||
When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
|
||
option is set, because the file would be different when written.
|
||
If you do this in a modeline, you might want to set 'nomodified' to
|
||
avoid this.
|
||
This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
|
||
|
||
*'fe'*
|
||
NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the
|
||
whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The
|
||
old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used.
|
||
|
||
*'fileencodings'* *'fencs'*
|
||
'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom", "ucs-bom,utf-8,latin1"
|
||
when 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)
|
||
global
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
|
||
a file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first mentioned
|
||
character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one in the list
|
||
is tried. When an encoding is found that works, 'fileencoding' is set
|
||
to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to an empty string, which
|
||
means the value of 'encoding' is used.
|
||
WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
|
||
'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants)
|
||
conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse
|
||
conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not
|
||
"utf-8" special characters may be lost!
|
||
For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
|
||
will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used. If you
|
||
prefer another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test
|
||
if your preferred encoding is to be used. Example: >
|
||
au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
|
||
\ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
|
||
< This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
|
||
non-blank characters.
|
||
The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
|
||
(Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded
|
||
by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
|
||
An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
|
||
because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
|
||
accepted.
|
||
WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG:
|
||
latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used
|
||
utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
|
||
file
|
||
cp1250,latin1 "cp1252" will always be used
|
||
If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
|
||
See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
|
||
Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
|
||
is read.
|
||
|
||
*'fileformat'* *'ff'*
|
||
'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos",
|
||
Unix default: "unix",
|
||
Macintosh default: "mac")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
|
||
reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
|
||
dos <CR> <NL>
|
||
unix <NL>
|
||
mac <CR>
|
||
When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
|
||
See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
|
||
For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
|
||
When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
|
||
works like it was set to "unix'.
|
||
This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
|
||
'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
|
||
When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
|
||
option is set, because the file would be different when written.
|
||
This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
|
||
For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos",
|
||
'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'fileformats'* *'ffs'*
|
||
'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default:
|
||
Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix",
|
||
Vim Unix: "unix,dos",
|
||
Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos",
|
||
Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos",
|
||
Vi others: "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried. It is
|
||
used when starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into
|
||
an existing buffer:
|
||
- When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
|
||
always. It is not set automatically.
|
||
- When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
|
||
is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The
|
||
'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
|
||
buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
|
||
- When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
|
||
<EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to
|
||
edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
|
||
1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
|
||
'fileformat' is set to "dos".
|
||
2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'
|
||
is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a
|
||
preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
|
||
3. If 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
|
||
This means that "mac" is only chosen when "unix" is not present,
|
||
or when no <NL> is found in the file, and when "dos" is not
|
||
present, or no <CR><NL> is present in the file.
|
||
Also if "unix" was first chosen, but the first <CR> is before
|
||
the first <NL> and there appears to be more <CR>'s than <NL>'s in
|
||
the file, then 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
|
||
4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
|
||
'fileformats' is used.
|
||
When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
|
||
this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
|
||
file only, the option is not changed.
|
||
When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.
|
||
|
||
For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
|
||
are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
|
||
done:
|
||
- When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos
|
||
format will be used.
|
||
- When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
|
||
is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
|
||
<CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
|
||
used.
|
||
Also see |file-formats|.
|
||
For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty
|
||
string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset,
|
||
otherwise 'textauto' is set.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'filetype'* *'ft'*
|
||
'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
|
||
All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
|
||
executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
|
||
name.
|
||
Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
|
||
This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable
|
||
this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
|
||
Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
|
||
for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
|
||
Example, for in an IDL file: >
|
||
/* vim: set filetype=idl : */
|
||
< |FileType| |filetypes|
|
||
Do not confuse this option with 'osfiletype', which is for the file
|
||
type that is actually stored with the file.
|
||
This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
|
||
'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
|
||
|
||
*'fillchars'* *'fcs'*
|
||
'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
|
||
and |+folding| features}
|
||
Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators.
|
||
It is a comma separated list of items:
|
||
|
||
item default Used for ~
|
||
stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window
|
||
stlnc:c ' ' or '-' statusline of the non-current windows
|
||
vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit|
|
||
fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext'
|
||
diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option
|
||
|
||
Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and
|
||
"stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-'
|
||
otherwise.
|
||
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:-
|
||
< This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also
|
||
be used when there is highlighting.
|
||
|
||
The highlighting used for these items:
|
||
item highlight group ~
|
||
stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine|
|
||
stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC|
|
||
vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit|
|
||
fold:c Folded |hl-Folded|
|
||
diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete|
|
||
|
||
*'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'*
|
||
'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198*
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set.
|
||
Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
|
||
toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|.
|
||
|
||
*'foldclose'* *'fcl'*
|
||
'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
|
||
its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to
|
||
automatically close when moving out of them.
|
||
|
||
*'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'*
|
||
'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side
|
||
of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum
|
||
value is 12.
|
||
See |folding|.
|
||
|
||
*'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'*
|
||
'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly
|
||
switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
|
||
folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled
|
||
with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
|
||
'foldenable' is off.
|
||
This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
|
||
See |folding|.
|
||
|
||
*'foldexpr'* *'fde'*
|
||
'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0")
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
or |+eval| feature}
|
||
The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated
|
||
for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. Also see
|
||
|eval-sandbox|.
|
||
|
||
*'foldignore'* *'fdi'*
|
||
'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#")
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with
|
||
characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
|
||
lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character.
|
||
The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|.
|
||
|
||
*'foldlevel'* *'fdl'*
|
||
'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
|
||
Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will
|
||
close fewer folds.
|
||
This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
|
||
See |fold-foldlevel|.
|
||
|
||
*'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'*
|
||
'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
|
||
Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
|
||
some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
|
||
This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
|
||
overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
|
||
ignores this option and closes all folds.
|
||
It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
|
||
overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
|
||
When the value is negative, it is not used.
|
||
|
||
*'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536*
|
||
'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}")
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There
|
||
must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The
|
||
marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
|
||
See |fold-marker|.
|
||
|
||
*'foldmethod'* *'fdm'*
|
||
'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual")
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values:
|
||
|fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually.
|
||
|fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold.
|
||
|fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
|
||
|fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds.
|
||
|fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
|
||
|fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed.
|
||
|
||
*'foldminlines'* *'fml'*
|
||
'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Sets the minimum number of screen lines for a fold to be displayed
|
||
closed. Also for manually closed folds.
|
||
Note that this only has an effect of what is displayed. After using
|
||
"zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
|
||
than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.
|
||
|
||
*'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'*
|
||
'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
|
||
methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more
|
||
than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.
|
||
|
||
*'foldopen'* *'fdo'*
|
||
'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,
|
||
search,tag,undo")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
|
||
command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated
|
||
list of items.
|
||
item commands ~
|
||
all any
|
||
block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc.
|
||
hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
|
||
insert any command in Insert mode
|
||
jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
|
||
mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
|
||
percent "%"
|
||
quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
|
||
search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
|
||
(not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
|
||
tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
|
||
undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
|
||
When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. Add
|
||
the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
|
||
When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
|
||
this option is not used. This means the operator will include the
|
||
whole closed fold.
|
||
Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
|
||
very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
|
||
In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
|
||
when text is inserted.
|
||
To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
|
||
set the 'foldclose' option to "all".
|
||
|
||
*'foldtext'* *'fdt'*
|
||
'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()")
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
||
feature}
|
||
An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
|
||
fold. See |fold-foldtext|.
|
||
|
||
*'formatoptions'* *'fo'*
|
||
'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
|
||
formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is
|
||
on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can
|
||
be inserted for readability.
|
||
To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
|
||
"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'formatprg'* *'fp'*
|
||
'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
|
||
selected with the "gq" command. The program must take the input on
|
||
stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is
|
||
such a program. If this option is an empty string, the internal
|
||
format function will be used |C-indenting|. Environment variables are
|
||
expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces
|
||
and backslashes.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
-->
|
||
*'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'*
|
||
'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that
|
||
all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag
|
||
is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution
|
||
of all or one match. See |complex-change|.
|
||
|
||
command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~
|
||
:s/// subst. all subst. one
|
||
:s///g subst. one subst. all
|
||
:s///gg subst. all subst. one
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'grepformat'* *'gfm'*
|
||
'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l%m,%f %l%m")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
|
||
This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
|
||
'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.
|
||
|
||
*'grepprg'* *'gp'*
|
||
'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ",
|
||
Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null",
|
||
Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n",
|
||
VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
Program to use for the ":grep" command. This option may contain '%'
|
||
and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
|
||
line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
|
||
will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See
|
||
|option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
||
When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"
|
||
also work well with a single file: >
|
||
:set grepprg=grep\ -nH
|
||
< See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
|
||
apply equally to 'grepprg'.
|
||
For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found,
|
||
otherwise it's "grep -n".
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549*
|
||
'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor,
|
||
ve:ver35-Cursor,
|
||
o:hor50-Cursor,
|
||
i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor,
|
||
r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor,
|
||
sm:block-Cursor
|
||
-blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175",
|
||
for MS-DOS and Win32 console:
|
||
"n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15,
|
||
r-cr:hor30,sm:block")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and
|
||
for MS-DOS and Win32 console}
|
||
This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different
|
||
modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only
|
||
the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by
|
||
specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or
|
||
horizontal cursor.
|
||
|
||
The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a
|
||
mode-list and an argument-list:
|
||
mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
|
||
The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
|
||
n Normal mode
|
||
v Visual mode
|
||
ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
|
||
if not specified)
|
||
o Operator-pending mode
|
||
i Insert mode
|
||
r Replace mode
|
||
c Command-line Normal (append) mode
|
||
ci Command-line Insert mode
|
||
cr Command-line Replace mode
|
||
sm showmatch in Insert mode
|
||
a all modes
|
||
The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
|
||
hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
|
||
ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
|
||
block block cursor, fills the whole character
|
||
[only one of the above three should be present]
|
||
blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking*
|
||
blinkon{N}
|
||
blinkoff{N}
|
||
blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
|
||
the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
|
||
the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
|
||
cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one
|
||
of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The
|
||
default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250".
|
||
These numbers are used for a missing entry. This
|
||
means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch
|
||
blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only
|
||
blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while
|
||
executing a command.
|
||
To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see
|
||
|xterm-blink|.
|
||
{group-name}
|
||
a highlight group name, that sets the color and font
|
||
for the cursor
|
||
{group-name}/{group-name}
|
||
Two highlight group names, the first is used when
|
||
no language mappings are used, the other when they
|
||
are. |language-mapping|
|
||
|
||
Examples of parts:
|
||
n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
|
||
block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
|
||
highlight group
|
||
i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
|
||
In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
|
||
30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
|
||
"iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit
|
||
faster.
|
||
|
||
The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for
|
||
all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used
|
||
to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off
|
||
blinking: "a:blinkon0"
|
||
|
||
Examples of cursor highlighting: >
|
||
:highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
|
||
:highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
|
||
<
|
||
*'guifont'* *'gfn'*
|
||
*E235* *E596* *E610* *E611*
|
||
'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
||
This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
|
||
In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When
|
||
the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other
|
||
font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
|
||
The first valid font is used.
|
||
When 'guifontset' is not empty, 'guifont' is not used.
|
||
Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name
|
||
precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra
|
||
backslash before a space and a backslash. See also
|
||
|option-backslash|. For example: >
|
||
:set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
|
||
< will make vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
|
||
will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.
|
||
For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: >
|
||
:set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11
|
||
< That's all. XLFDs are no longer accepted.
|
||
*E236*
|
||
Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
|
||
width).
|
||
To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
|
||
program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.
|
||
For Win32, GTK and Photon only: >
|
||
:set guifont=*
|
||
< will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.
|
||
If none of the fonts can be loaded, vim will keep the current setting.
|
||
If an empty font list is given, vim will try using other resource
|
||
settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
|
||
will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
|
||
the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim
|
||
will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.
|
||
For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245*
|
||
- takes these options in the font name:
|
||
hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
|
||
wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
|
||
b - bold
|
||
i - italic
|
||
u - underline
|
||
s - strikeout
|
||
cXX - character set XX. valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
|
||
BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
|
||
HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
|
||
SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
|
||
|
||
Use a ':' to separate the options.
|
||
- A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
|
||
backslashes to escape the spaces.
|
||
- Examples: >
|
||
:set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
|
||
:set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
|
||
< Have a look at <http://nova.bsuvc.bsu.edu/prn/monofont/> for
|
||
mono-spaced fonts and comments on them.
|
||
See also |font-sizes|.
|
||
|
||
*'guifontset'* *'gfs'*
|
||
*E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598*
|
||
'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
|
||
with the |+xfontset| feature}
|
||
{not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
|
||
When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first
|
||
one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See
|
||
|xfontset|.
|
||
Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as
|
||
a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the
|
||
|:highlight| command.
|
||
The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the
|
||
character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting
|
||
'guifontset' will fail.
|
||
Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont'
|
||
the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be
|
||
used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name,
|
||
including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative
|
||
fontset names.
|
||
This example works on many X11 systems: >
|
||
:set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-*
|
||
<
|
||
*'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534*
|
||
'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
||
When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used
|
||
for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is
|
||
used.
|
||
Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
|
||
specified with 'guifont' and the same height.
|
||
|
||
All GUI versions but GTK+ 2:
|
||
|
||
'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and
|
||
'guifontset' is empty or invalid.
|
||
When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and
|
||
'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching
|
||
double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it.
|
||
|
||
GTK+ 2 GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk2*
|
||
|
||
If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width
|
||
characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8".
|
||
Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide'
|
||
automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the
|
||
font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need
|
||
to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
|
||
made by Pango/Xft.
|
||
|
||
*'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'*
|
||
'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50)
|
||
global
|
||
The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting
|
||
the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started,
|
||
e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will
|
||
be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel
|
||
lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the
|
||
screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the
|
||
screen.
|
||
|
||
*'guioptions'* *'go'*
|
||
'guioptions' 'go' string (default "gmrLtT" (MS-Windows),
|
||
"agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
||
This option only has an effect in the GUI version of vim. It is a
|
||
sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
|
||
GUI should be used.
|
||
To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
|
||
"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
|
||
|
||
Valid letters are as follows:
|
||
*guioptions_a*
|
||
'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
|
||
or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
|
||
the windowing system's global selection. This means that the
|
||
Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
|
||
applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode
|
||
ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
|
||
application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
|
||
is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
|
||
Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
|
||
applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
|
||
If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
|
||
windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
|
||
by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
|
||
The same applies to the modeless selection.
|
||
|
||
'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only
|
||
applies to the modeless selection.
|
||
|
||
'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~
|
||
"" - -
|
||
"a" yes yes
|
||
"A" - yes
|
||
"aA" yes yes
|
||
|
||
'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
|
||
choices.
|
||
'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell
|
||
where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the
|
||
editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you
|
||
can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the
|
||
foreground. |gui-fork|
|
||
Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have
|
||
happened already when the gvimrc file is read.
|
||
|
||
'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper
|
||
corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of
|
||
limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|.
|
||
|
||
'm' Menu bar is present.
|
||
'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note
|
||
that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
|
||
switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the .gvimrc
|
||
file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
|
||
":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
|
||
'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If
|
||
'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
|
||
Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items.
|
||
|
||
't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32,
|
||
GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI.
|
||
'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, and
|
||
Athena GUIs.
|
||
|
||
'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
|
||
'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
|
||
split window.
|
||
'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
|
||
'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
|
||
split window.
|
||
'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present.
|
||
|
||
And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
|
||
you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.
|
||
|
||
'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included,
|
||
a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
|
||
vertical layout is used anyway.
|
||
'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some
|
||
window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
|
||
the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done
|
||
before starting the GUI. Set it in your gvimrc. Adding or
|
||
removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
|
||
'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|.
|
||
|
||
*'guipty'* *'noguipty'*
|
||
'guipty' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
||
Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for
|
||
I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|.
|
||
|
||
*'helpfile'* *'hf'*
|
||
'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
|
||
(others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be
|
||
placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories
|
||
in 'runtimepath' will be used.
|
||
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example:
|
||
"$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
|
||
tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
|
||
spaces and backslashes.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'helpheight'* *'hh'*
|
||
'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +windows
|
||
feature}
|
||
Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
|
||
":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the
|
||
current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
|
||
windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
|
||
set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable.
|
||
|
||
*'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'*
|
||
'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a
|
||
buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still
|
||
displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course.
|
||
The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer
|
||
hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is
|
||
modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!'
|
||
flag was used. See also |windows.txt|.
|
||
This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
|
||
WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers.
|
||
Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!".
|
||
|
||
*'highlight'* *'hl'*
|
||
'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string):
|
||
"8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
|
||
e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
|
||
M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
|
||
s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit
|
||
t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
|
||
f:Folded,F:FoldColumn")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
|
||
occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The
|
||
first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to
|
||
use for that occasion. The occasions are:
|
||
|hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map"
|
||
|hl-NonText| @ '~' and '@' at the end of the window and
|
||
characters from 'showbreak'
|
||
|hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special
|
||
things in listings
|
||
|hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages
|
||
h (obsolete, ignored)
|
||
|hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting
|
||
|hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch')
|
||
|hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt|
|
||
|hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
|
||
|hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands
|
||
|hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
|
||
|hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line|
|
||
|hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows
|
||
|hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
|
||
|hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows
|
||
|hl-Visual| v Visual mode
|
||
|hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the
|
||
Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and
|
||
|xterm-clipboard|.
|
||
|hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages
|
||
|hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu'
|
||
|hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds
|
||
|hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn'
|
||
|
||
The display modes are:
|
||
r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me")
|
||
i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR")
|
||
b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me")
|
||
s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se")
|
||
u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue")
|
||
n no highlighting
|
||
- no highlighting
|
||
: use a highlight group
|
||
The default is used for occasions that are not included.
|
||
If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors|
|
||
for an example.
|
||
When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of
|
||
a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type
|
||
of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to
|
||
define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion.
|
||
See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'*
|
||
'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
|
||
<!--
|
||
The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the
|
||
'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by
|
||
default.
|
||
-->
|
||
Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
|
||
are not applied.
|
||
<!--
|
||
See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
|
||
-->
|
||
When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
|
||
off with |:nohlsearch|. As soon as you use a search command, the
|
||
highlighting comes back.
|
||
When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
|
||
highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the
|
||
search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first
|
||
line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not
|
||
drawn may not continue in an newly drawn line.
|
||
|
||
*'history'* *'hi'*
|
||
'history' 'hi' number (default: 20)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
|
||
are remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in
|
||
each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|).
|
||
<!--
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
-->
|
||
<!--
|
||
|
||
*'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'*
|
||
'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set.
|
||
Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
|
||
toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'*
|
||
'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on.
|
||
This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard.
|
||
See |rileft.txt|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'icon'* *'noicon'*
|
||
'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
|
||
'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
|
||
currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used.
|
||
Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
|
||
Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently
|
||
only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are
|
||
Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the
|
||
builtin termcap).
|
||
When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
|
||
restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on
|
||
X11.
|
||
|
||
*'iconstring'*
|
||
'iconstring' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
|
||
the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
|
||
Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
|
||
(currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option).
|
||
Does not work for MS Windows.
|
||
When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
|
||
restored if possible |X11|.
|
||
When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
|
||
expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See
|
||
'titlestring' for example settings.
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'*
|
||
'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags
|
||
file.
|
||
Also see 'smartcase'.
|
||
Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
|
||
|/ignorecase|.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'imactivatekey'* *'imak'*
|
||
'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with |+xim| and
|
||
|+GUI_GTK|}
|
||
Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for
|
||
activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control
|
||
IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'.
|
||
You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option
|
||
tells Vim what the key is.
|
||
Format:
|
||
[MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING
|
||
|
||
These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored):
|
||
S Shift key
|
||
L Lock key
|
||
C Control key
|
||
1 Mod1 key
|
||
2 Mod2 key
|
||
3 Mod3 key
|
||
4 Mod4 key
|
||
5 Mod5 key
|
||
Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are
|
||
both shift+ctrl+space.
|
||
See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING.
|
||
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set imactivatekey=S-space
|
||
< "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 +
|
||
canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean).
|
||
|
||
*'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'*
|
||
'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+xim|
|
||
|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
|
||
When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
|
||
line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
|
||
Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
|
||
English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
|
||
characters with dead keys.
|
||
|
||
*'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'nodisable'* *'noimd'*
|
||
'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+xim|
|
||
|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
|
||
When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable
|
||
the IM when it doesn't work properly.
|
||
Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This
|
||
may change in later releases.
|
||
|
||
*'iminsert'* *'imi'*
|
||
'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
|
||
Insert mode. Valid values:
|
||
0 :lmap is off and IM is off
|
||
1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
|
||
2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
|
||
2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim|
|
||
or |global-ime|.
|
||
To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
|
||
this can be used: >
|
||
:inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
|
||
< This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
|
||
mode.
|
||
Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
|
||
|i_CTRL-^|.
|
||
The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
|
||
It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
|
||
The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
|
||
methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
|
||
|
||
*'imsearch'* *'ims'*
|
||
'imsearch' 'ims' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
|
||
entering a search pattern. Valid values:
|
||
-1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
|
||
'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
|
||
0 :lmap is off and IM is off
|
||
1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
|
||
2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
|
||
Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
|
||
|c_CTRL-^|.
|
||
The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
|
||
option to a valid keymap name.
|
||
The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
|
||
methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
|
||
|
||
*'include'* *'inc'*
|
||
'include' 'inc' string (default "^#\s*include")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the
|
||
|+find_in_path| feature}
|
||
Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search
|
||
pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default
|
||
value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i",
|
||
"]I", "[d", etc.. The 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file
|
||
name that comes after the matched pattern. See |option-backslash|
|
||
about including spaces and backslashes.
|
||
|
||
*'includeexpr'* *'inex'*
|
||
'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the
|
||
|+find_in_path| or |+eval| feature}
|
||
Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
|
||
option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >
|
||
:set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
|
||
< The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
|
||
Evaluated in the |sandbox|.
|
||
Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
|
||
found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
|
||
Also used for |<cfile>|.
|
||
|
||
*'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'*
|
||
'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the
|
||
|+extra_search| feature}
|
||
While typing a search pattern, show immediately where the so far
|
||
typed pattern matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the
|
||
pattern is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will
|
||
be updated often, this is only useful on fast terminals. Note that
|
||
the match will be shown, but the cursor is not actually positioned
|
||
there. You still need to finish the search command with <CR> to move
|
||
the cursor. The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in
|
||
'highlight'. See also: 'hlsearch'.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'indentexpr'* *'inde'*
|
||
'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
||
or |+eval| features}
|
||
Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
|
||
It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
|
||
in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
|
||
When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
|
||
'smartindent' indenting.
|
||
When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting.
|
||
The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
|
||
which the indent is to be computed.
|
||
The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It
|
||
can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
|
||
used for the indent).
|
||
Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
|
||
and |lispindent()|.
|
||
The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must
|
||
not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the
|
||
cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
|
||
Normally this option would be set to call a function: >
|
||
:set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
|
||
< Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
|
||
"msg".
|
||
See |indent-expression|. Also see |eval-sandbox|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'indentkeys'* *'indk'*
|
||
'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
||
feature}
|
||
A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
|
||
the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
|
||
The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
|
||
See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.
|
||
|
||
*'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'*
|
||
'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
|
||
'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted. If the
|
||
typed text contains a lowercase letter where the match has an upper
|
||
case letter, the completed part is made lowercase. If the typed text
|
||
has no lowercase letters and the match has a lowercase letter where
|
||
the typed text has an uppercase letter, and there is a letter before
|
||
it, the completed part is made uppercase.
|
||
|
||
*'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'*
|
||
'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful
|
||
if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|.
|
||
These Insert mode commands will be useful:
|
||
- Use the cursor keys to move around.
|
||
- Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|). When
|
||
this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off.
|
||
Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished.
|
||
*i_CTRL-L*
|
||
- Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use
|
||
<Esc> to get back to Insert mode.
|
||
|
||
These items change when 'insertmode' is set:
|
||
- when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode.
|
||
- <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps.
|
||
- <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode.
|
||
- CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted.
|
||
- CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z*
|
||
However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like
|
||
'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same
|
||
mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set.
|
||
When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used.
|
||
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'isfname'* *'isf'*
|
||
'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
|
||
"@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,="
|
||
for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:"
|
||
for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~"
|
||
for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="
|
||
otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
|
||
path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
|
||
the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
|
||
Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
|
||
characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
|
||
For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
|
||
|
||
Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
|
||
do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit
|
||
tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
|
||
characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
|
||
name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The
|
||
'&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
|
||
cmd.exe.
|
||
|
||
The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
|
||
Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two
|
||
character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a
|
||
decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
|
||
not work for digits). Example:
|
||
"_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range
|
||
128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
|
||
If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
|
||
will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left
|
||
to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is
|
||
included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
|
||
option or the end of a range. Example:
|
||
"^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
|
||
If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
|
||
are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
|
||
plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples:
|
||
"@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
|
||
case letters.
|
||
"a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character.
|
||
A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
|
||
expected. Example:
|
||
"48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore.
|
||
A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example:
|
||
" -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding
|
||
comma, plus <Tab>.
|
||
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
||
|
||
*'isident'* *'isi'*
|
||
'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
|
||
"@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
|
||
otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
|
||
Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
|
||
match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a
|
||
|pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
|
||
option.
|
||
Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
|
||
environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
|
||
expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead.
|
||
|
||
*'iskeyword'* *'isk'*
|
||
'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32:
|
||
"@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
|
||
otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255"
|
||
Vi default: "@,48-57,_")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
|
||
"w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See
|
||
'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C
|
||
programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
|
||
For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
|
||
'*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
|
||
command).
|
||
When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'isprint'* *'isp'*
|
||
'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh:
|
||
"@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
|
||
screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from
|
||
space (ascii 32) to '~' (ascii 126) are always displayed directly,
|
||
even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See
|
||
'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.
|
||
|
||
Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
|
||
0 - 31 "^@" - "^_"
|
||
32 - 126 always single characters
|
||
127 "^?"
|
||
128 - 159 "~@" - "~_"
|
||
160 - 254 "| " - "|~"
|
||
255 "~?"
|
||
When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are
|
||
displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
|
||
When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
|
||
displayed as <xx>.
|
||
The NonText highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
|
||
|hl-NonText|
|
||
|
||
Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
|
||
characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character
|
||
is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
|
||
replacement character will be shown.
|
||
Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
|
||
There is no option to specify these characters.
|
||
|
||
*'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'*
|
||
'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
|
||
When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'.
|
||
Otherwise only one space is inserted.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'key'*
|
||
'key' string (default "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer.
|
||
See |encryption|.
|
||
Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed
|
||
key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: >
|
||
:set key=
|
||
< It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or
|
||
"echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't
|
||
know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it,
|
||
be careful not to make a typing error!
|
||
|
||
*'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544*
|
||
'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+keymap|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|.
|
||
Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
|
||
setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
|
||
'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
|
||
|
||
*'keymodel'* *'km'*
|
||
'keymodel' 'km' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys
|
||
can do. These values can be used:
|
||
startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
|
||
Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
|
||
present in 'selectmode').
|
||
stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
|
||
Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
|
||
<PageUp> and <PageDown>.
|
||
The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
||
|
||
*'keywordprg'* *'kp'*
|
||
'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help",
|
||
OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are
|
||
expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
|
||
help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
|
||
value did this, which is now deprecated.)
|
||
When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the
|
||
"K" command to a section number. Also for "man -s", in which case the
|
||
"-s" is removed when there is no count.
|
||
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set keywordprg=man\ -s
|
||
< This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358*
|
||
'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+langmap|
|
||
feature}
|
||
This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
|
||
mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
|
||
inserted directly. When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes
|
||
care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
|
||
of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
|
||
be able to execute Normal mode commands.
|
||
This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
|
||
mapped in Insert mode.
|
||
This only works for 8-bit characters. The value of 'langmap' may be
|
||
specified with multi-byte characters (e.g., UTF-8), but only the lower
|
||
8 bits of each character will be used.
|
||
|
||
Example (for Greek): *greek* >
|
||
:set langmap=<3D>A,<2C>B,<2C>C,<2C>D,<2C>E,<2C>F,<2C>G,<2C>H,<2C>I,<2C>J,<2C>K,<2C>L,<2C>M,<2C>N,<2C>O,<2C>P,QQ,<2C>R,<2C>S,<2C>T,<2C>U,<2C>V,WW,<2C>X,<2C>Y,<2C>Z,<2C>a,<2C>b,<2C>c,<2C>d,<2C>e,<2C>f,<2C>g,<2C>h,<2C>i,<2C>j,<2C>k,<2C>l,<2C>m,<2C>n,<2C>o,<2C>p,qq,<2C>r,<2C>s,<2C>t,<2C>u,<2C>v,<2C>w,<2C>x,<2C>y,<2C>z
|
||
< Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >
|
||
:set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
|
||
<
|
||
The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each
|
||
part can be in one of two forms:
|
||
1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately
|
||
followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
|
||
2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to"
|
||
characters. Example: "abc;ABC"
|
||
Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
|
||
Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are
|
||
";", ',' and backslash itself.
|
||
|
||
This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
|
||
back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will
|
||
be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
|
||
langmap mappings) in the following cases:
|
||
o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
|
||
o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
|
||
o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
|
||
Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
|
||
this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time
|
||
allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
|
||
Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!
|
||
|
||
*'langmenu'* *'lm'*
|
||
'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+menu| and
|
||
|+multi_lang| features}
|
||
Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded
|
||
from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >
|
||
"lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim"
|
||
< (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
|
||
matter what $LANG is set to: >
|
||
:set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
|
||
< When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
|
||
If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
|
||
the English menus: >
|
||
:set langmenu=none
|
||
< This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
|
||
detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting
|
||
this option has no effect. But you could do this: >
|
||
:source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
|
||
:set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
|
||
:source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
|
||
< Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
|
||
|
||
*'laststatus'* *'ls'*
|
||
'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
|
||
status line:
|
||
0: never
|
||
1: only if there are at least two windows
|
||
2: always
|
||
The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
|
||
windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|
|
||
|
||
*'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'*
|
||
'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
|
||
executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
|
||
typed. To force an update use |:redraw|.
|
||
|
||
*'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'*
|
||
'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
|
||
feature}
|
||
If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
|
||
than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike
|
||
'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
|
||
it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. The
|
||
value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines. This
|
||
option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on.
|
||
Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
|
||
with the right amount of white space.
|
||
|
||
*'lines'* *E593*
|
||
'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height)
|
||
global
|
||
Number of lines in the display. Normally you don't need to set this.
|
||
That is done automatically by the terminal initialization code.
|
||
When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
|
||
option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
|
||
to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
|
||
When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
|
||
number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up.
|
||
|
||
*'linespace'* *'lsp'*
|
||
'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only in the GUI}
|
||
Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font
|
||
uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
|
||
When non-zero there is room for underlining.
|
||
|
||
*'lisp'* *'nolisp'*
|
||
'lisp' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
|
||
the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with
|
||
"cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p'
|
||
flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or
|
||
better. Also see 'lispwords'.
|
||
The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the
|
||
"=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
|
||
calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
|
||
This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
|
||
{Vi: Does it a little bit differently}
|
||
|
||
*'lispwords'* *'lw'*
|
||
'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting.
|
||
|'lisp'|
|
||
|
||
*'list'* *'nolist'*
|
||
'list' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to window
|
||
List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I, show end of line with $. Useful to
|
||
see the difference between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks.
|
||
Note that this will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' or
|
||
'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for
|
||
changing the way tabs are displayed.
|
||
|
||
*'listchars'* *'lcs'*
|
||
'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Strings to use in 'list' mode. It is a comma separated list of string
|
||
settings.
|
||
eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When
|
||
omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
|
||
line.
|
||
tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a Tab. The first
|
||
char is used once. The second char is repeated to
|
||
fill the space that the Tab normally occupies.
|
||
"tab:>-" will show a Tab that takes four spaces as
|
||
">---". When omitted, a Tab is show as ^I.
|
||
trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted,
|
||
trailing spaces are blank.
|
||
extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
|
||
off and the line continues beyond the right of the
|
||
screen.
|
||
precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
|
||
is off and there is text preceeding the character
|
||
visible in the first column.
|
||
|
||
The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can
|
||
be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable
|
||
characters are allowed.
|
||
|
||
Examples: >
|
||
:set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
|
||
:set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<
|
||
:set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
|
||
< The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
|
||
"precedes". "SpecialKey" for "tab" and "trail".
|
||
|
||
*'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'*
|
||
'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
|
||
This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
|
||
of plugins.
|
||
Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
|
||
reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
|
||
|
||
*'magic'* *'nomagic'*
|
||
'magic' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns.
|
||
See |pattern|.
|
||
NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep
|
||
this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with
|
||
old Vi scripts. In any other situation write patterns that work when
|
||
'magic' is on.
|
||
|
||
*'makeef'* *'mef'*
|
||
'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
|
||
and the |:grep| command.
|
||
When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
|
||
When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
|
||
unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
|
||
existing file.
|
||
NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that.
|
||
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
||
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'makeprg'* *'mp'*
|
||
'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. This
|
||
option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded like
|
||
when used in a command-line. Environment variables are expanded
|
||
|:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and
|
||
backslashes. Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set"
|
||
and once for the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter
|
||
called "myfilter" do it like this: >
|
||
:set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
|
||
< The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
|
||
where the arguments will be included, for example: >
|
||
:set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
|
||
< This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'matchpairs'* *'mps'*
|
||
'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the
|
||
other. Currently only single character pairs are allowed, and they
|
||
must be different. The characters must be separated by a colon. The
|
||
pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and '>'
|
||
(HTML): >
|
||
:set mps+=<:>
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
< A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
|
||
assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >
|
||
:au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;
|
||
|
||
< For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
|
||
the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help|
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'matchtime'* *'mat'*
|
||
'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5)
|
||
global
|
||
Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
|
||
set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
|
||
set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi.
|
||
|
||
*'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'*
|
||
'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally
|
||
catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with
|
||
more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use
|
||
more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
|
||
See also |:function|.
|
||
|
||
*'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223*
|
||
'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
|
||
character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like
|
||
":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg",
|
||
because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also
|
||
|key-mapping|.
|
||
|
||
*'maxmem'* *'mm'*
|
||
'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system
|
||
dependent) or half the amount of memory
|
||
available)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this
|
||
limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause
|
||
other memory to be freed. Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work
|
||
without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'.
|
||
|
||
*'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'*
|
||
'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system
|
||
dependent) or half the amount of memory
|
||
available)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for all buffers together.
|
||
Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. Also see
|
||
'maxmem'.
|
||
|
||
*'menuitems'* *'mis'*
|
||
'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+menu|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are
|
||
generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this
|
||
option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.
|
||
|
||
*'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'*
|
||
'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
*'modelines'* *'mls'*
|
||
'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
|
||
checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
|
||
no lines are checked. See |modeline|.
|
||
NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'*
|
||
'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and
|
||
'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
|
||
Can be reset with the |-M| command line argument.
|
||
|
||
*'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'*
|
||
'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set
|
||
when:
|
||
1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the
|
||
|undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
|
||
option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the
|
||
buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
|
||
when it was written.
|
||
2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
|
||
value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or
|
||
written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
|
||
values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
|
||
reset.
|
||
When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
|
||
will be ignored.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'more'* *'nomore'*
|
||
'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
||
global
|
||
When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get
|
||
the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the
|
||
listing continues until finished.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'mouse'* *E538*
|
||
'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals
|
||
(xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, qnx pterm, and Linux console
|
||
with gpm). For using the mouse in the GUI, see |gui-mouse|.
|
||
The mouse can be enabled for different modes:
|
||
n Normal mode
|
||
v Visual mode
|
||
i Insert mode
|
||
c Command-line mode
|
||
h all previous modes when editing a help file
|
||
a all previous modes
|
||
r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt
|
||
A auto-select in Visual mode
|
||
Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: >
|
||
:set mouse=a
|
||
< When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for
|
||
modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor.
|
||
|
||
See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|.
|
||
|
||
Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
|
||
"* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of
|
||
the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed.
|
||
Also see the 'clipboard' option.
|
||
|
||
*'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'*
|
||
'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only works in the GUI}
|
||
The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
|
||
When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
|
||
mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the
|
||
default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
|
||
a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.
|
||
|
||
*'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'*
|
||
'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only works in the GUI}
|
||
When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
|
||
The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.
|
||
|
||
*'mousemodel'* *'mousem'*
|
||
'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what
|
||
the right mouse button is used for:
|
||
extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works
|
||
like in an xterm.
|
||
popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left
|
||
mouse button extends a selection. This works like
|
||
with Microsoft Windows
|
||
popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
|
||
position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
|
||
selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
|
||
If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
|
||
be acted upon, ie. no cursor move. This implies of
|
||
course, that right clicking outside a selection will
|
||
end Visual mode.
|
||
Overview of what button does what for each model:
|
||
mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~
|
||
left click place cursor place cursor
|
||
left drag start selection start selection
|
||
shift-left search word extend selection
|
||
right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor)
|
||
right drag extend selection -
|
||
middle click paste paste
|
||
|
||
In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
|
||
You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|.
|
||
|
||
Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
|
||
See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless
|
||
selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly).
|
||
|
||
The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
||
|
||
*'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547*
|
||
'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
|
||
m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow"
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape|
|
||
feature}
|
||
This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
|
||
different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much
|
||
like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list
|
||
and an argument-list:
|
||
mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
|
||
The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
|
||
In a normal window: ~
|
||
n Normal mode
|
||
v Visual mode
|
||
ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
|
||
if not specified)
|
||
o Operator-pending mode
|
||
i Insert mode
|
||
r Replace mode
|
||
|
||
Others: ~
|
||
c appending to the command-line
|
||
ci inserting in the command-line
|
||
cr replacing in the command-line
|
||
m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
|
||
ml idem, but cursor in the last line
|
||
e any mode, pointer below last window
|
||
s any mode, pointer on a status line
|
||
sd any mode, while dragging a status line
|
||
vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
|
||
vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
|
||
a everywhere
|
||
|
||
The shape is one of the following:
|
||
avail name looks like ~
|
||
w x arrow Normal mouse pointer
|
||
w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!)
|
||
w x beam I-beam
|
||
w x updown up-down sizing arrows
|
||
w x leftright left-right sizing arrows
|
||
w x busy The system's usual busy pointer
|
||
w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer
|
||
x udsizing indicates up-down resizing
|
||
x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing
|
||
x crosshair like a big thin +
|
||
x hand1 black hand
|
||
x hand2 white hand
|
||
x pencil what you write with
|
||
x question big ?
|
||
x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up
|
||
w x up-arrow arrow pointing up
|
||
x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)
|
||
|
||
The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
|
||
x for X11.
|
||
Any modes not specifed or shapes not available use the normal mouse
|
||
pointer.
|
||
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
|
||
< will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
|
||
indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
|
||
clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)
|
||
|
||
*'mousetime'* *'mouset'*
|
||
'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum
|
||
time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be
|
||
recognized as a multi click.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'nrformats'* *'nf'*
|
||
'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "octal,hex")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
|
||
CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
|
||
respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
|
||
alpha if included, single alphabetical characters will be
|
||
incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a
|
||
letter index a), b), etc.
|
||
octal if included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
|
||
to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
|
||
hex if included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
|
||
considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on
|
||
"0x100" results in "0x0ff".
|
||
Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
|
||
considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not
|
||
recognized as octal or hex.
|
||
<!--
|
||
|
||
*'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'*
|
||
'number' 'nu' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to window
|
||
Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is
|
||
excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
|
||
line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set).
|
||
When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
|
||
characters are put before the number.
|
||
See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
|
||
|
||
*'osfiletype'* *'oft'* *E366*
|
||
'osfiletype' 'oft' string (RISC-OS default: "Text",
|
||
others default: "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+osfiletype|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Some operating systems store extra information about files besides
|
||
name, datestamp and permissions. This option contains the extra
|
||
information, the nature of which will vary between systems.
|
||
The value of this option is usually set when the file is loaded, and
|
||
use to set the file type when file is written.
|
||
It can affect the pattern matching of the automatic commands.
|
||
|autocmd-osfiletypes|
|
||
|
||
*'paragraphs'* *'para'*
|
||
'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP LIpplpipbp")
|
||
global
|
||
Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs
|
||
of two letters (see |object-motions|).
|
||
|
||
*'paste'* *'nopaste'*
|
||
'paste' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy
|
||
some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid
|
||
unexpected effects.
|
||
Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim
|
||
cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim
|
||
knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste'
|
||
being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the
|
||
mouse clicks itself.
|
||
When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on):
|
||
- mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled
|
||
- abbreviations are disabled
|
||
- 'textwidth' is set to 0
|
||
- 'wrapmargin' is set to 0
|
||
- 'autoindent' is reset
|
||
- 'smartindent' is reset
|
||
- 'softtabstop' is set to 0
|
||
- 'revins' is reset
|
||
- 'ruler' is reset
|
||
- 'showmatch' is reset
|
||
- 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty
|
||
These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled:
|
||
- 'lisp'
|
||
- 'indentexpr'
|
||
- 'cindent'
|
||
NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is
|
||
on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the
|
||
settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to
|
||
set the 'paste' option again.
|
||
When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to
|
||
the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on.
|
||
Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect.
|
||
Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use
|
||
the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key.
|
||
|
||
*'pastetoggle'* *'pt'*
|
||
'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste'
|
||
option. This is like specifying a mapping: >
|
||
:map {keys} :set invpaste<CR>
|
||
< Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'.
|
||
The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set.
|
||
'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in
|
||
Command-line mode.
|
||
Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However,
|
||
when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do
|
||
this: >
|
||
:map <F10> :set paste<CR>
|
||
:map <F11> :set nopaste<CR>
|
||
:imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR>
|
||
:imap <F11> <nop>
|
||
:set pastetoggle=<F11>
|
||
< This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode.
|
||
Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste
|
||
mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key
|
||
sequence.
|
||
|
||
*'pex'* *'patchexpr'*
|
||
'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
|
||
the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|.
|
||
|
||
*'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206*
|
||
'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used
|
||
to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
|
||
source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a
|
||
copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the
|
||
name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
|
||
appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like
|
||
".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The
|
||
backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has
|
||
been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a
|
||
backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is
|
||
created.
|
||
When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
|
||
Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
|
||
end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
|
||
recognized as a compressed file.
|
||
|
||
*'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347*
|
||
'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
|
||
on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,,"
|
||
other systems: ".,,")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
|
||
|gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find| and other commands, provided that the file
|
||
being searched for has a relative path (not starting with '/'). The
|
||
directories in the 'path' option may be relative or absolute.
|
||
- Use commas to separate directory names: >
|
||
:set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
|
||
< - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards
|
||
compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory
|
||
name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: >
|
||
:set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
|
||
< - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
|
||
backslash: >
|
||
:set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
|
||
< - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >
|
||
:set path=.
|
||
< - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
|
||
commas: >
|
||
:set path=,,
|
||
< - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
|
||
- Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
||
- When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding
|
||
"http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
|
||
- Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree:
|
||
1) "*" matches a sequence of characters, e.g.: >
|
||
:set path=/usr/include/*
|
||
< means all subdirectories in /usr/include (but not /usr/include
|
||
itself). >
|
||
:set path=/usr/*c
|
||
< matches /usr/doc and /usr/src.
|
||
2) "**" matches a subtree, up to 100 directories deep. Example: >
|
||
:set path=/home/user_x/src/**
|
||
< means search in the whole subtree under "/home/usr_x/src".
|
||
3) If the path ends with a ';', this path is the startpoint
|
||
for upward search.
|
||
See |file-searching| for more info and exact syntax.
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature}
|
||
- Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >
|
||
:set path=.,c:\\include
|
||
< Or just use '/' instead: >
|
||
:set path=.,c:/include
|
||
< Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
|
||
the file!
|
||
The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly
|
||
it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
|
||
You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
|
||
'path', see |:checkpath|.
|
||
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
||
directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
||
uses another default. To remove the current directory use: >
|
||
:set path-=
|
||
< To add the current directory use: >
|
||
:set path+=
|
||
< To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
|
||
separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
|
||
names are separated with a semi-colon: >
|
||
:let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
|
||
< Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that
|
||
this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
|
||
|
||
*'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'*
|
||
'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
|
||
indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a
|
||
series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is
|
||
enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option
|
||
means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
|
||
for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
|
||
NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
|
||
tabs and spaces. You might not like this.
|
||
NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
Also see 'copyindent'.
|
||
Use |:retab| to clean up white space.
|
||
|
||
*'previewheight'* *'pvh'*
|
||
'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
|
||
|+quickfix| feature}
|
||
Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated
|
||
commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
|
||
|
||
*'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'*
|
||
*'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590*
|
||
'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
|
||
|+quickfix| feature}
|
||
Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option
|
||
set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
|
||
|:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
|
||
|
||
*'printdevice'* *'pdev'*
|
||
'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
||
feature}
|
||
This defines the name of the printer to be used when the |:hardcopy|
|
||
command is issued with a bang (!) to skip the printer selection
|
||
dialog. On Win32, it should be the printer name exactly as it appears
|
||
in the standard printer dialog.
|
||
If the option is empty, then vim will use the system default printer
|
||
for ":hardcopy!"
|
||
|
||
*'printencoding'* *'penc'* *E620*
|
||
'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for:
|
||
Windows, OS/2: cp1252,
|
||
Macintosh: mac-roman,
|
||
VMS: dec-mcs,
|
||
HPUX: hp-roman8,
|
||
EBCDIC: ebcdic-uk)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
||
and |+postscript| features}
|
||
Sets the character encoding used when printing. This option tells VIM
|
||
which print character encoding file from the "print" directory in
|
||
'runtimepath' to use.
|
||
|
||
This option will accept any value from |encoding-names|. Any
|
||
recognized names are converted to VIM standard names - see 'encoding'
|
||
for more details. Names not recognized by VIM will just be converted
|
||
to lower case and underscores replaced with '-' signs.
|
||
|
||
If 'printencoding' is empty or VIM cannot find the file then it will
|
||
use 'encoding' (if VIM is compiled with |+multi_byte| and it is set an
|
||
8-bit encoding) to find the print character encoding file. If VIM is
|
||
unable to find a character encoding file then it will use the "latin1"
|
||
print character encoding file.
|
||
|
||
When 'encoding' is set to a multi-byte encoding, VIM will try to
|
||
convert characters to the printing encoding for printing (if
|
||
'printencoding' is empty then the conversion will be to latin1).
|
||
Conversion to a printing encoding other than latin1 will require VIM
|
||
to be compiled with the |+iconv| feature. If no conversion is
|
||
possible then printing will fail. Any characters that cannot be
|
||
converted will be replaced with upside down question marks.
|
||
|
||
Four print character encoding files are provided to support default
|
||
Mac, VMS, HPUX, and EBCDIC character encodings and are used by default
|
||
on these platforms. Code page 1252 print character encoding is used
|
||
by default on Windows and OS/2 platforms.
|
||
|
||
|
||
*'printexpr'* *'pexpr'*
|
||
'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
||
and |+postscript| features}
|
||
Expression that is evaluated to print the PostScript produced with
|
||
":hardcopy".
|
||
The file name to be printed is in |v:fname_in|.
|
||
The arguments to the ":hardcopy" command are in |v:cmdarg|.
|
||
The expression must take care of deleting the file after printing it.
|
||
When there is an error, the expression must return a non-zero number.
|
||
If there is no error, return zero or an empty string.
|
||
The default for non MS-Windows or VMS systems is to simply use "lpr"
|
||
to print the file: >
|
||
|
||
system('lpr' . (&printdevice == '' ? '' : ' -P' . &printdevice)
|
||
. ' ' . v:fname_in) . delete(v:fname_in) + v:shell_error
|
||
<
|
||
On MS-Windows machines the default is to copy the file to the
|
||
currently specified printdevice: >
|
||
|
||
system('copy' . ' ' . v:fname_in . ' "' . &printdevice . '"')
|
||
. delete(v:fname_in)
|
||
<
|
||
On VMS machines the default is to send the file to either the default
|
||
or currently specified printdevice: >
|
||
|
||
system('print' . (&printdevice == '' ? '' : ' /queue=' .
|
||
&printdevice) . ' ' . v:fname_in) . delete(v:fname_in)
|
||
<
|
||
If you change this option, using a function is an easy way to avoid
|
||
having to escape all the spaces. Example: >
|
||
|
||
:set printexpr=PrintFile(v:fname_in)
|
||
:function PrintFile(fname)
|
||
: call system("ghostview " . a:fname)
|
||
: call delete(a:fname)
|
||
: return v:shell_error
|
||
:endfunc
|
||
|
||
< Be aware that some print programs return control before they have read
|
||
the file. If you delete the file too soon it will not be printed.
|
||
These programs usually offer an option to have them remove the file
|
||
when printing is done.
|
||
*E365*
|
||
If evaluating the expression fails or it results in a non-zero number,
|
||
you get an error message. In that case Vim will delete the
|
||
file. In the default value for non-MS-Windows a trick is used: Adding
|
||
"v:shell_error" will result in a non-zero number when the system()
|
||
call fails.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'printfont'* *'pfn'* *E613*
|
||
'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
||
feature}
|
||
This is the name of the font that will be used for the |:hardcopy|
|
||
command's output. It has the same format as the 'guifont' option,
|
||
except that only one font may be named, and the special "guifont=*"
|
||
syntax is not available.
|
||
In the Win32 GUI version this specifies a font name with its extra
|
||
attributes, as with the 'guifont' option.
|
||
For other systems, only ":h11" is recognized, where "11" is the point
|
||
size of the font. When omitted, the points size is 10.
|
||
|
||
*'printheader'* *'pheader'*
|
||
'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
||
feature}
|
||
This defines the format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output.
|
||
The option is defined in the same way as the 'statusline' option.
|
||
If Vim has not been compiled with the |+statusline| feature, this
|
||
option has no effect and a simple default header is used, which shows
|
||
the page number.
|
||
|
||
*'printoptions'* *'popt'*
|
||
'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with |+printer| feature}
|
||
This is a comma-separated list of items that control the format of
|
||
the output of |:hardcopy|:
|
||
|
||
left:{spec} left margin (default: 10pc)
|
||
right:{spec} right margin (default: 5pc)
|
||
top:{spec} top margin (default: 5pc)
|
||
bottom:{spec} bottom margin (default: 5pc)
|
||
{spec} is a number followed by "in" for
|
||
inches, "pt" for points (1 point is 1/72 of an
|
||
inch), "mm" for millimetres or "pc" for a
|
||
percentage of the media size.
|
||
Weird example:
|
||
left:2in,top:30pt,right:16mm,bottom:3pc
|
||
If the unit is not recognized there is no
|
||
error and the default value is used.
|
||
|
||
header:{nr} Number of lines to reserve for the header.
|
||
Only the first line is actually filled, thus
|
||
when {nr} is 2 there is one empty line. The
|
||
header is formatted according to
|
||
'printheader'.
|
||
header:0 Do not print a header.
|
||
header:2 (default) Use two lines for the header
|
||
|
||
syntax:n Do not use syntax highlighting. This is
|
||
faster and thus useful when printing large
|
||
files.
|
||
syntax:y Do syntax highlighting.
|
||
syntax:a (default) Use syntax highlighting if the printer appears
|
||
to be able to print color or grey.
|
||
|
||
number:y Include line numbers in the printed output.
|
||
number:n (default) No line numbers.
|
||
|
||
wrap:y (default) Wrap long lines.
|
||
wrap:n Truncate long lines.
|
||
|
||
duplex:off Print on one side.
|
||
duplex:long (default) Print on both sides (when possible), bind on
|
||
long side.
|
||
duplex:short Print on both sides (when possible), bind on
|
||
short side.
|
||
|
||
collate:y (default) Collating: 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3
|
||
collate:n No collating: 1 1 1, 2 2 2, 3 3 3
|
||
|
||
jobsplit:n (default) Do all copies in one print job
|
||
jobsplit:y Do each copy as a separate print job. Useful
|
||
when doing N-up postprocessing.
|
||
|
||
portrait:y (default) Orientation is portrait.
|
||
portrait:n Orientation is landscape.
|
||
*a4* *letter*
|
||
paper:A4 (default) Paper size: A4
|
||
paper:{name} Paper size from this table:
|
||
{name} size in cm size in inch ~
|
||
10x14 25.4 x 35.57 10 x 14
|
||
A3 29.7 x 42 11.69 x 16.54
|
||
A4 21 x 29.7 8.27 x 11.69
|
||
A5 14.8 x 21 5.83 x 8.27
|
||
B4 25 x 35.3 10.12 x 14.33
|
||
B5 17.6 x 25 7.17 x 10.12
|
||
executive 18.42 x 26.67 7.25 x 10.5
|
||
folio 21 x 33 8.27 x 13
|
||
ledger 43.13 x 27.96 17 x 11
|
||
legal 21.59 x 35.57 8.5 x 14
|
||
letter 21.59 x 27.96 8.5 x 11
|
||
quarto 21.59 x 27.5 8.5 x 10.83
|
||
statement 13.97 x 21.59 5.5 x 8.5
|
||
tabloid 27.96 x 43.13 11 x 17
|
||
|
||
formfeed:n (default) Treat form feed characters (0x0c) as a normal
|
||
print character.
|
||
formfeed:y When a form feed character is encountered,
|
||
continue printing of the current line at the
|
||
beginning of the first line on a new page.
|
||
|
||
The item indicated with (default) is used when the item is not
|
||
present. The values are not always used, especially when using a
|
||
dialog to select the printer and options.
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set printoptions=paper:letter,duplex:off
|
||
<
|
||
*'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'*
|
||
'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from
|
||
accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started
|
||
in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
|
||
When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is
|
||
set for the newly edited buffer. When using ":w!" the 'readonly'
|
||
option is reset for the current buffer.
|
||
|
||
*'remap'* *'noremap'*
|
||
'remap' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for
|
||
a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command.
|
||
|
||
*'report'*
|
||
'report' number (default 2)
|
||
global
|
||
Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of
|
||
changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
|
||
":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
|
||
For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
|
||
instead of the number of lines.
|
||
|
||
*'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'*
|
||
'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also
|
||
happens when executing external commands.
|
||
|
||
For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te'
|
||
options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring:
|
||
set t_ti= t_te=
|
||
To enable restoring (for an xterm):
|
||
set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8
|
||
(Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it)
|
||
|
||
*'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'*
|
||
'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing
|
||
backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
|
||
command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'*
|
||
'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., character
|
||
that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
|
||
Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
|
||
are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
|
||
This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
|
||
simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
|
||
useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
|
||
and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
|
||
in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|.
|
||
|
||
*'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* *'norightleftcmd'* *'norlc'*
|
||
'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search")
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
|
||
right-to-left mode for a group of commands:
|
||
|
||
search "/" and "?" commands
|
||
|
||
This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
|
||
The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
|
||
|
||
*'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
|
||
'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the
|
||
|+cmdline_info| feature}
|
||
Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
|
||
comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
|
||
text in the file is shown on the far right:
|
||
Top first line is visible
|
||
Bot last line is visible
|
||
All first and last line are visible
|
||
45% relative position in the file
|
||
If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
|
||
Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the
|
||
ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the
|
||
screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (ie. not empty),
|
||
this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat'
|
||
If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
|
||
bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both
|
||
the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
|
||
separated with a dash.
|
||
For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
|
||
For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
|
||
This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
|
||
If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
|
||
you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'rulerformat'* *'ruf'*
|
||
'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
|
||
string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
|
||
The format of this option, is like that of 'statusline'.
|
||
The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15
|
||
characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
|
||
<
|
||
*'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles*
|
||
'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default:
|
||
Unix: "$HOME/.vim,
|
||
$VIM/vimfiles,
|
||
$VIMRUNTIME,
|
||
$VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
||
$HOME/.vim/after"
|
||
Amiga: "home:vimfiles,
|
||
$VIM/vimfiles,
|
||
$VIMRUNTIME,
|
||
$VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
||
home:vimfiles/after"
|
||
PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles,
|
||
$VIM/vimfiles,
|
||
$VIMRUNTIME,
|
||
$VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
||
$HOME/vimfiles/after"
|
||
Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles,
|
||
$VIMRUNTIME,
|
||
$VIM:vimfiles:after"
|
||
RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles,
|
||
$VIMRUNTIME,
|
||
Choices:vimfiles/after"
|
||
VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles,
|
||
$VIM/vimfiles,
|
||
$VIMRUNTIME,
|
||
$VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
||
sys$login:vimfiles/after"
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime
|
||
files:
|
||
filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype|
|
||
scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts|
|
||
colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme|
|
||
compiler/ compiler files |:compiler|
|
||
doc/ documentation |write-local-help|
|
||
ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
|
||
indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression|
|
||
keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
|
||
lang/ menu translations |:menutrans|
|
||
menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim|
|
||
plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin|
|
||
syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
|
||
tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor|
|
||
|
||
And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.
|
||
|
||
The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations:
|
||
1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences.
|
||
2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system
|
||
administrator.
|
||
3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim.
|
||
*after-directory*
|
||
4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is
|
||
for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed
|
||
defaults (rarely needed)
|
||
5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for
|
||
personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults
|
||
or system-wide settings (rarely needed).
|
||
|
||
Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal
|
||
wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
|
||
runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
|
||
wildcards.
|
||
See |:runtime|.
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
|
||
< This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
|
||
personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a
|
||
group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime
|
||
files).
|
||
You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the
|
||
distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME
|
||
to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put
|
||
a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed
|
||
runtime files.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'scroll'* *'scr'*
|
||
'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height)
|
||
local to window
|
||
Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be
|
||
set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
|
||
changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
|
||
be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window
|
||
height with ":set scroll=0".
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'*
|
||
'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
|
||
feature}
|
||
See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current
|
||
window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have
|
||
this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the
|
||
differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
|
||
See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be
|
||
interpreted.
|
||
This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
|
||
file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
|
||
with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'scrolljump'* *'sj'*
|
||
'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1)
|
||
global
|
||
Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
|
||
screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
|
||
CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
|
||
|
||
*'scrolloff'* *'so'*
|
||
'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0)
|
||
global
|
||
Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
|
||
This will make some context visible around where you are working. If
|
||
you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
|
||
in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
|
||
when long lines wrap).
|
||
For scrolling horizontallly see 'sidescrolloff'.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'scrollopt'* *'sbo'*
|
||
'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump")
|
||
global
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
|
||
'scrollbind' windows should behave.
|
||
The following words are available:
|
||
ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
|
||
hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
|
||
jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
|
||
scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first
|
||
displayed line of the bound windows. When moving
|
||
around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
|
||
reach a position before the start or after the end of
|
||
the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when
|
||
moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
|
||
to the desired position when possible.
|
||
When now making that window the current one, two
|
||
things can be done with the relative offset:
|
||
1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
|
||
adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
|
||
window. When going back to the other window, the
|
||
the new relative offset will be used.
|
||
2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
|
||
scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When
|
||
going back to the other window, it still uses the
|
||
same relative offset.
|
||
Also see |scroll-binding|.
|
||
|
||
*'sections'* *'sect'*
|
||
'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh")
|
||
global
|
||
Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of
|
||
two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start
|
||
at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".
|
||
|
||
*'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523*
|
||
'secure' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in
|
||
".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are
|
||
displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into
|
||
problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is
|
||
only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be
|
||
dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set
|
||
'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'selection'* *'sel'*
|
||
'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive")
|
||
global
|
||
This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used
|
||
in Visual and Select mode.
|
||
Possible values:
|
||
value past line inclusive ~
|
||
old no yes
|
||
inclusive yes yes
|
||
exclusive yes no
|
||
"past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
|
||
character past the line.
|
||
"inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
|
||
in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the
|
||
selection.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'selectmode'* *'slm'*
|
||
'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start
|
||
Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
|
||
Possible values:
|
||
mouse when using the mouse
|
||
key when using shifted special keys
|
||
cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
|
||
See |Select-mode|.
|
||
The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
||
|
||
*'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
|
||
'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,
|
||
help,options,winsize")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +mksession
|
||
feature}
|
||
Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma
|
||
separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring
|
||
something:
|
||
word save and restore ~
|
||
blank empty windows
|
||
buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
|
||
curdir the current directory
|
||
folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
|
||
fold options
|
||
globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter
|
||
and contain at least one lowercase letter.
|
||
help the help window
|
||
localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
|
||
global values for local options)
|
||
options all options and mappings (also global values for local
|
||
options)
|
||
resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
|
||
sesdir the directory in which the session file is located
|
||
will become the current directory (useful with
|
||
projects accessed over a network from different
|
||
systems)
|
||
slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
|
||
slashes
|
||
unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
|
||
on Windows or DOS
|
||
winpos position of the whole Vim window
|
||
winsize window sizes
|
||
|
||
Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir".
|
||
When "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored with
|
||
absolute paths.
|
||
"slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files
|
||
with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
|
||
but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
|
||
|
||
*'shell'* *'sh'* *E91*
|
||
'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh",
|
||
MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or
|
||
"cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd")
|
||
global
|
||
Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the
|
||
value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
|
||
'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
|
||
It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f".
|
||
See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
||
Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
||
If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose
|
||
it in quotes. Example: >
|
||
:set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
|
||
< Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
|
||
each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the
|
||
"-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command
|
||
name. And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path
|
||
separators.
|
||
For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment
|
||
variable to change the way external commands are executed. See the
|
||
libc.inf file of DJGPP.
|
||
Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be
|
||
included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com"
|
||
works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g.,
|
||
filtering).
|
||
For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is
|
||
changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: >
|
||
:set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos
|
||
< This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
|
||
'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
|
||
does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
|
||
"bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like
|
||
systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to
|
||
reduce the need to set this option by the user. It's not used for
|
||
OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself). See |option-backslash| about
|
||
including spaces and backslashes. See |dos-shell|.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'shellpipe'* *'sp'*
|
||
'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
||
feature}
|
||
String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
|
||
error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about
|
||
including spaces and backslashes.
|
||
The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
|
||
(the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
|
||
of this option).
|
||
For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly
|
||
saved in a file and not echoed to the screen.
|
||
For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved
|
||
in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
|
||
"tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the
|
||
'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "zsh" or "bash" the default becomes
|
||
"2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included.
|
||
The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
|
||
and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
|
||
there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
|
||
explicitly set before.
|
||
When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
|
||
":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
|
||
that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do
|
||
want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
|
||
Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
|
||
In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
|
||
become obsolete (at least for Unix).
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'shellquote'* *'shq'*
|
||
'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
|
||
contains "sh" somewhere: "\"")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
|
||
the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the
|
||
quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's
|
||
probably not useful to set both options.
|
||
This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for
|
||
third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
|
||
or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according
|
||
the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
|
||
user. See |dos-shell|.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'shellredir'* *'srr'*
|
||
'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
|
||
file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces
|
||
and backslashes.
|
||
The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
|
||
(the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
|
||
of this option).
|
||
The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh"
|
||
or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the
|
||
'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes
|
||
">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included.
|
||
For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked
|
||
for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with
|
||
".exe" appended are checked for.
|
||
The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
|
||
and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
|
||
there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
|
||
explicitly set before.
|
||
In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
|
||
become obsolete (at least for Unix).
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'*
|
||
'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is
|
||
useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or
|
||
cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to
|
||
forward slashes by Vim.
|
||
Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
|
||
existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
|
||
any file for best results. This might change in the future.
|
||
'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
|
||
separator. To test if this is so use: >
|
||
if exists('+shellslash')
|
||
<
|
||
*'shelltype'* *'st'*
|
||
'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0)
|
||
global
|
||
On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work
|
||
which use a shell.
|
||
0 and 1: always use the shell
|
||
2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines
|
||
4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command
|
||
When not using the shell, the command is executed directly.
|
||
|
||
0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands
|
||
1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands
|
||
|
||
*'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
|
||
'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: "";
|
||
for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"
|
||
somewhere: "\""
|
||
for Unix, when using system(): "\"")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
|
||
the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See
|
||
'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful
|
||
to set both options.
|
||
This is an empty string by default. Known to be useful for
|
||
third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn
|
||
Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted
|
||
according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option
|
||
by the user. See |dos-shell|.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'*
|
||
'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and <
|
||
commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
|
||
a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'shiftwidth'* *'sw'*
|
||
'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for
|
||
|'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
|
||
|
||
*'shortmess'* *'shm'*
|
||
'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
|
||
messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
|
||
It is a list of flags:
|
||
flag meaning when present ~
|
||
f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)"
|
||
i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]"
|
||
l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters"
|
||
m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"
|
||
n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]"
|
||
r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"
|
||
w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message
|
||
and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
|
||
x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of
|
||
"[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]".
|
||
a all of the above abbreviations
|
||
|
||
o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message
|
||
for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on)
|
||
O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message.
|
||
Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn").
|
||
s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search
|
||
hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages
|
||
t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit
|
||
on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column.
|
||
Ignored in Ex mode.
|
||
T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to
|
||
fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle.
|
||
Ignored in Ex mode.
|
||
W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file
|
||
A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file
|
||
is found.
|
||
I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|.
|
||
|
||
This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
|
||
requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
|
||
possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you
|
||
would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
|
||
Useful values:
|
||
shm= No abbreviation of message.
|
||
shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
|
||
shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.
|
||
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'*
|
||
'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3
|
||
characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this
|
||
option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when
|
||
adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available
|
||
for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful
|
||
when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos
|
||
or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this
|
||
option is always on by default.
|
||
|
||
*'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595*
|
||
'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
|
||
feature}
|
||
String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful
|
||
values are "> " or "+++ ".
|
||
Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
|
||
comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
|
||
part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
|
||
The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in
|
||
'highlight'.
|
||
Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
|
||
If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
|
||
"n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
|
||
|
||
*'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'*
|
||
'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default:
|
||
off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the
|
||
|+cmdline_info| feature}
|
||
Show (partial) command in status line. Set this option off if your
|
||
terminal is slow.
|
||
In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
|
||
- When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
|
||
- When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
|
||
- When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: linesxcolumns.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'*
|
||
'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
|
||
tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
|
||
pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have
|
||
matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
|
||
required (coding style permitting).
|
||
|
||
*'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'*
|
||
'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The
|
||
jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to
|
||
show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
|
||
A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
|
||
seen or not). This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
|
||
When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
|
||
will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
|
||
See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
|
||
blinking when showing the match.
|
||
Note: For the use of the short form parental guidance is advised.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'*
|
||
'showmode' 'smd' boolean (default: on)
|
||
global
|
||
If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
|
||
Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for
|
||
this message.
|
||
<!--
|
||
When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this
|
||
doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is
|
||
not set.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'sidescroll'* *'ss'*
|
||
'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0)
|
||
global
|
||
The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when
|
||
the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
|
||
When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
|
||
Not used for "zh" and "zl" commands.
|
||
|
||
*'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'*
|
||
'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0)
|
||
global
|
||
The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
|
||
right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a value
|
||
greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero value
|
||
makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
|
||
horizontally (except at the end and beginning of the line). Setting
|
||
this option to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the
|
||
cursor horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not
|
||
come too close to the beginning or end of the line.
|
||
<!--
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as
|
||
in the following example to never allow the cursor to move
|
||
onto the "extends" character:
|
||
|
||
:set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
|
||
:set sidescrolloff=1
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
|
||
*'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'*
|
||
'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
|
||
case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and
|
||
'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
|
||
":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.. After
|
||
"*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
|
||
recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'*
|
||
'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the
|
||
|+smartindent| feature}
|
||
Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like
|
||
programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does
|
||
something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
|
||
see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on, setting 'si' has no effect.
|
||
'indentexpr' is a more advanced alternative.
|
||
Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
|
||
An indent is automatically inserted:
|
||
- After a line ending in '{'.
|
||
- After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
|
||
- Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command).
|
||
When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
|
||
given the same indent as the matching '{'.
|
||
When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
|
||
that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent
|
||
is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this
|
||
mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
|
||
When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
|
||
right.
|
||
NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. When 'paste'
|
||
is set smart indenting is disabled.
|
||
|
||
*'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'*
|
||
'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to
|
||
'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' is used in other places. A <BS> will delete
|
||
a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the line.
|
||
When off a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop'.
|
||
'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or right
|
||
|shift-left-right|.
|
||
What gets inserted (a Tab or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'
|
||
option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the
|
||
number of spaces minimized by using <Tab>s.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'softtabstop'* *'sts'*
|
||
'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing
|
||
operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like
|
||
<Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is
|
||
used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value
|
||
of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However,
|
||
commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
|
||
When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
|
||
'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
|
||
See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
|
||
spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
|
||
'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +windows
|
||
feature}
|
||
When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
|
||
one. |:split|
|
||
|
||
*'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'*
|
||
'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
||
feature}
|
||
When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
|
||
current one. |:vsplit|
|
||
|
||
*'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'*
|
||
'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
|
||
blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column
|
||
(if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B,
|
||
CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", , and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>"
|
||
with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing
|
||
commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that
|
||
only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
|
||
In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
|
||
where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E541* *E542*
|
||
'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line.
|
||
Also see |status-line|.
|
||
|
||
The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
|
||
normal text. Each status line item is of the form:
|
||
%-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
|
||
All fields except the {item} is optional. A single percent sign can
|
||
be given as "%%".
|
||
|
||
Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
|
||
'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.
|
||
|
||
field meaning ~
|
||
- Left justify the item. The default is right justified
|
||
when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
|
||
0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'.
|
||
minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'.
|
||
Value must be 50 or less.
|
||
maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<'
|
||
on the left for text items. Numeric items will be
|
||
shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number
|
||
where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
|
||
an exponential notation.
|
||
item A one letter code as described below.
|
||
|
||
Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The
|
||
second character in "item" is the type:
|
||
N for number
|
||
S for string
|
||
F for flags as described below
|
||
- not applicable
|
||
|
||
item meaning ~
|
||
f S Path to the file in the buffer, relative to current directory.
|
||
F S Full path to the file in the buffer.
|
||
t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
|
||
m F Modified flag, text is " [+]" or " [-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
|
||
M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
|
||
r F Readonly flag, text is " [RO]".
|
||
R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
|
||
h F Help buffer flag, text is " [help]".
|
||
H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
|
||
w F Preview window flag, text is " [Preview]".
|
||
W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
|
||
y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., " [vim]". See 'filetype'.
|
||
Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'.
|
||
{not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature}
|
||
k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
|
||
being used: "<keymap>"
|
||
n N Buffer number.
|
||
b N Value of byte under cursor.
|
||
B N As above, in hexadecimal.
|
||
o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
|
||
Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
|
||
{not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature}
|
||
O N As above, in hexadecimal.
|
||
N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.)
|
||
l N Line number.
|
||
L N Number of lines in buffer.
|
||
c N Column number.
|
||
v N Virtual column number.
|
||
V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
|
||
p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
|
||
P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the
|
||
percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length.
|
||
a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max})
|
||
Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
|
||
{ NF Evaluate expression between '{' and '}' and substitute result.
|
||
( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and
|
||
alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere.
|
||
) - End of item group. No width fields allowed.
|
||
< - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start.
|
||
No width fields allowed.
|
||
= - Separation point between left and right aligned items.
|
||
No width fields allowed.
|
||
* - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
|
||
minwid field. eg. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*.
|
||
The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied
|
||
to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows.
|
||
The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9|
|
||
|
||
Display of flags are controlled by the following heuristic:
|
||
If a flag text starts with comma it is assumed that it wants to
|
||
separate itself from anything but preceding plaintext. If it starts
|
||
with a space it is assumed that it wants to separate itself from
|
||
anything but other flags. That is: A leading comma is removed if the
|
||
preceding character stems from plaintext. A leading space is removed
|
||
if the preceding character stems from another active flag. This will
|
||
make a nice display when flags are used like in the examples below.
|
||
|
||
When all items in a group becomes an empty string (ie. flags that are
|
||
not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
|
||
become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear
|
||
completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >
|
||
:set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
|
||
<
|
||
Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
|
||
line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set
|
||
temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
|
||
currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context.
|
||
The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
|
||
real current buffer. The expression is evaluated in the |sandbox|.
|
||
|
||
If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
|
||
a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
|
||
setting an option without changing its value. Example: >
|
||
:let &ro = &ro
|
||
|
||
< A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
|
||
Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
|
||
described above.
|
||
|
||
Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable !
|
||
If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
|
||
edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
|
||
:set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
|
||
< Similar, but add ascii value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >
|
||
:set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
|
||
< Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >
|
||
:set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
|
||
:hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
|
||
< Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >
|
||
:set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
|
||
< In the |:autocmd|'s: >
|
||
:let b:gzflag = 1
|
||
< And: >
|
||
:unlet b:gzflag
|
||
< And define this function: >
|
||
:function VarExists(var, val)
|
||
: if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
|
||
:endfunction
|
||
<
|
||
*'suffixes'* *'su'*
|
||
'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
|
||
match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the
|
||
suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as
|
||
the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
|
||
separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
|
||
including spaces and backslashes).
|
||
See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
|
||
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
||
suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
||
uses another default.
|
||
|
||
*'suffixesadd'* *'sua'*
|
||
'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "")
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the
|
||
|+file_in_path| feature}
|
||
Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
|
||
file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: >
|
||
:set suffixesadd=.java
|
||
<
|
||
*'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'*
|
||
'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a
|
||
swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with
|
||
confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
|
||
Careful: All text will be in memory:
|
||
- Don't use this for big files.
|
||
- Recovery will be impossible!
|
||
A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and
|
||
'swapfile' is set.
|
||
When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
|
||
immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
|
||
non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
|
||
Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|.
|
||
|
||
This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
|
||
specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
|
||
|
||
*'swapsync'* *'sws'*
|
||
'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after
|
||
writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems.
|
||
When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and
|
||
not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work.
|
||
On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it,
|
||
so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some
|
||
systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system
|
||
setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default
|
||
fsync(), which may work better on some systems.
|
||
|
||
*'switchbuf'* *'swb'*
|
||
'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
|
||
Possible values (comma separated list):
|
||
useopen If included, jump to the first open window that
|
||
contains the specified buffer (if there is one).
|
||
Otherwise: Do not examine other windows.
|
||
This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when
|
||
jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is
|
||
also used in all buffer related split commands, for
|
||
example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind".
|
||
split If included, split the current window before loading
|
||
a buffer. Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
|
||
Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
|
||
|
||
*'syntax'* *'syn'*
|
||
'syntax' 'syn' string (default emtpy)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
|
||
syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
|
||
Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
|
||
b:current_syntax variable does).
|
||
This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
|
||
not automatically recognized. Example, for in an IDL file: >
|
||
/* vim: set syntax=idl : */
|
||
< To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
|
||
:set syntax=OFF
|
||
< To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
|
||
'filetype' option: >
|
||
:set syntax=ON
|
||
< What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
|
||
Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
|
||
This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
|
||
'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
|
||
|
||
*'tabstop'* *'ts'*
|
||
'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see
|
||
|:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option.
|
||
|
||
Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file
|
||
appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it).
|
||
|
||
There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim:
|
||
1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4
|
||
(or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim
|
||
will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing Tab and BS will
|
||
behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters.
|
||
2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use
|
||
'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The
|
||
formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed.
|
||
3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a
|
||
|modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only
|
||
works when using Vim to edit the file.
|
||
4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and
|
||
'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only)
|
||
for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have
|
||
tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this
|
||
though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is
|
||
changed.
|
||
|
||
*'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'*
|
||
'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
|
||
use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary
|
||
searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
|
||
will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
|
||
Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
|
||
they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the
|
||
'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.
|
||
|
||
When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
|
||
files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
|
||
certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When
|
||
'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.
|
||
|
||
Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
|
||
at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
|
||
!_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some command/
|
||
< [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]
|
||
|
||
When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
|
||
files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used
|
||
instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
|
||
Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
|
||
be found in the retry.
|
||
|
||
If a tag file indicates that is is case-fold sorted, the second,
|
||
linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case. Use a value
|
||
of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be
|
||
case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in
|
||
the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "excuberant ctags" version
|
||
5.3 or higher the -f or --fold-case-sort switch can be used for this
|
||
as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work.
|
||
|
||
When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
|
||
exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags
|
||
files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
|
||
When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
|
||
ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
|
||
must be included in the tags file.
|
||
This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
|
||
command-line completion and ":help").
|
||
{Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}
|
||
|
||
*'taglength'* *'tl'*
|
||
'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0)
|
||
global
|
||
If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.
|
||
|
||
*'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'*
|
||
'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
If on and using a tag file in another directory, file names in that
|
||
tag file are relative to the directory where the tag file is.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'tags'* *'tag'* *E433*
|
||
'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with
|
||
|+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To
|
||
include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash
|
||
(see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes).
|
||
When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
|
||
of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
|
||
'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see
|
||
|tags-option|.
|
||
"*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
|
||
a directory tree. See |file-searching|. {not available when compiled
|
||
without the |+path_extra| feature}
|
||
If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag
|
||
files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The
|
||
default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case
|
||
differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags|
|
||
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
||
file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
||
uses another default.
|
||
{Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"}
|
||
|
||
*'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'*
|
||
'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
{not in all versions of Vi}
|
||
When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or
|
||
":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
|
||
tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
|
||
any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
|
||
tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
|
||
Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
|
||
mapping which should not change the tagstack.
|
||
|
||
*'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531*
|
||
'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails:
|
||
in the GUI: "builtin_gui"
|
||
on Amiga: "amiga"
|
||
on BeOS: "beos-ansi"
|
||
on Mac: "mac-ansi"
|
||
on MiNT: "vt52"
|
||
on MS-DOS: "pcterm"
|
||
on OS/2: "os2ansi"
|
||
on Unix: "ansi"
|
||
on VMS: "ansi"
|
||
on Win 32: "win32")
|
||
global
|
||
Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control
|
||
characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
||
For example: >
|
||
:set term=$TERM
|
||
< See |termcap|.
|
||
|
||
*'termbidi'* *'tbidi'*
|
||
*'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'*
|
||
'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
|
||
feature}
|
||
The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
|
||
by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
|
||
that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
|
||
Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
|
||
'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
|
||
Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
|
||
'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
|
||
This option is reset when the GUI is started.
|
||
For further details see |arabic.txt|.
|
||
|
||
*'termencoding'* *'tenc'*
|
||
'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
||
feature}
|
||
|
||
Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character
|
||
encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For
|
||
the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
|
||
display).
|
||
*E617*
|
||
Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI. After the GUI has been
|
||
successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8".
|
||
Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error
|
||
message is shown.
|
||
When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option.
|
||
This is the normal value.
|
||
Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See
|
||
|encoding-table|.
|
||
The value for this option must be supported by iconv(). When iconv()
|
||
cannot handle the value, no conversion will be done and you will
|
||
probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters.
|
||
Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and
|
||
want to edit a UTF-8 file: >
|
||
:let &termencoding = &encoding
|
||
:set encoding=utf-8
|
||
< You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.
|
||
|
||
*'terse'* *'noterse'*
|
||
'terse' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message
|
||
for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being
|
||
displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi
|
||
shortens a lot of messages}
|
||
|
||
*'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'*
|
||
'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'.
|
||
For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is
|
||
set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is
|
||
reset, 'fileformats' is made empty.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'*
|
||
'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on,
|
||
others: default off)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'.
|
||
For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is
|
||
set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to
|
||
"unix".
|
||
|
||
*'textwidth'* *'tw'*
|
||
'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
|
||
Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be
|
||
broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables
|
||
this. 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. When
|
||
'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also
|
||
'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'thesaurus'* *'tsr'*
|
||
'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "")
|
||
global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
||
|
||
List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
|
||
for thesesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. Each line in
|
||
the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
|
||
non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line
|
||
length is 510 bytes.
|
||
To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
|
||
http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
|
||
To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
|
||
after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
|
||
name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
|
||
The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
||
directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
||
uses another default.
|
||
Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'*
|
||
'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
|
||
NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'*
|
||
'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
*'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'*
|
||
'ttimeout' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
These two options together determine the behavior when part of a
|
||
mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received:
|
||
|
||
'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~
|
||
off off do not time out
|
||
on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes
|
||
off on time out on key codes
|
||
|
||
If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete
|
||
mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there
|
||
is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For
|
||
example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next
|
||
character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'.
|
||
When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for
|
||
the next character to arrive. After that the already received
|
||
characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can
|
||
be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option.
|
||
On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause
|
||
malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits
|
||
forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start
|
||
with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have
|
||
problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key
|
||
sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and
|
||
reset the 'timeout' option.
|
||
|
||
NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
||
|
||
*'timeoutlen'* *'tm'*
|
||
'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000)
|
||
global
|
||
{not in all versions of Vi}
|
||
*'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'*
|
||
'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key
|
||
sequence to complete. Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and
|
||
'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a different timeout value for key codes is
|
||
desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to a non-negative number.
|
||
|
||
ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~
|
||
< 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen'
|
||
>= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen'
|
||
|
||
The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options
|
||
tell so. A useful setting would be
|
||
:set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100
|
||
(time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after
|
||
a tenth of a second).
|
||
|
||
*'title'* *'notitle'*
|
||
'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
|
||
'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
|
||
filename [+=-] (path) - VIM
|
||
Where:
|
||
filename the name of the file being edited
|
||
- indicates the file canot be modified, 'ma' off
|
||
+ indicates the file was modified
|
||
= indicates the file is read-only
|
||
=+ indicates the file is read-only and modified
|
||
(path) is the path of the file being edited
|
||
- VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM"
|
||
Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles
|
||
(currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and
|
||
terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and
|
||
iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap).
|
||
*X11*
|
||
When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
|
||
be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11"
|
||
when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also
|
||
works for the icon name |'icon'|.
|
||
But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title
|
||
will not work (except in the GUI).
|
||
If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'.
|
||
You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then.
|
||
When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command:
|
||
rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY &
|
||
then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the
|
||
title of the window should change back to what it should be after
|
||
exiting Vim.
|
||
|
||
*'titlelen'*
|
||
'titlelen' number (default 85)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
||
feature}
|
||
Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
|
||
title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
|
||
shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
|
||
Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But
|
||
it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
|
||
available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
|
||
bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise,
|
||
values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
|
||
'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.
|
||
|
||
*'titleold'*
|
||
'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only available when compiled with the |+title|
|
||
feature}
|
||
This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the
|
||
original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or
|
||
'titlestring' is not empty.
|
||
*'titlestring'*
|
||
'titlestring' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
|
||
window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on.
|
||
Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently
|
||
Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a
|
||
non-empty 't_ts' option).
|
||
When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
|
||
be restored if possible |X11|.
|
||
When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
|
||
expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p")
|
||
:set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
|
||
< The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
|
||
of the available space.
|
||
Some people prefer to have the file name first: >
|
||
:set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
|
||
< Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
|
||
without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
|
||
separating space only when needed.
|
||
NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
|
||
to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
|
||
|
||
*'toolbar'* *'tb'*
|
||
'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips")
|
||
global
|
||
{only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and
|
||
|+GUI_Photon|}
|
||
The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The
|
||
possible values are:
|
||
icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons.
|
||
text Toolbar buttons shown with text.
|
||
horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are
|
||
horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI}
|
||
tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons.
|
||
Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse
|
||
cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment.
|
||
|
||
If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the
|
||
following: >
|
||
:set tb=icons,text
|
||
< Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They
|
||
will show icons if both are requested.
|
||
|
||
If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if
|
||
'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable
|
||
the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: >
|
||
:set guioptions-=T
|
||
< Also see |gui-toolbar|.
|
||
|
||
*'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'*
|
||
'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
|
||
Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are:
|
||
tiny Use tiny toolbar icons.
|
||
small Use small toolbar icons (default).
|
||
medium Use medium-sized toolbar icons.
|
||
large Use large toolbar icons.
|
||
The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on
|
||
the current theme. Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,
|
||
small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
|
||
|
||
If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined
|
||
by user preferences or the current theme is used.
|
||
|
||
*'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'*
|
||
'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones.
|
||
When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones.
|
||
When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for
|
||
the change to take effect, for example: >
|
||
:set notbi term=$TERM
|
||
< See also |termcap|.
|
||
Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin
|
||
termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty
|
||
xterm entries...).
|
||
|
||
*'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'*
|
||
'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm,
|
||
sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or
|
||
iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in
|
||
a DOS console)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to
|
||
the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line
|
||
commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple
|
||
windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region.
|
||
Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen
|
||
line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the
|
||
mouse in an xterm and other terminals.
|
||
|
||
*'ttymouse'* *'ttym'*
|
||
'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term')
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not
|
||
available when compiled without |+mouse|}
|
||
Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized.
|
||
Currently these three strings are valid:
|
||
*xterm-mouse*
|
||
xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates
|
||
"<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes:
|
||
"s" = button state
|
||
"c" = column plus 33
|
||
"r" = row plus 33
|
||
xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the
|
||
mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works
|
||
much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at
|
||
least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to
|
||
work. See below for how Vim detects this
|
||
automatically.
|
||
*netterm-mouse*
|
||
netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates
|
||
"<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers
|
||
for the row and column.
|
||
*dec-mouse*
|
||
dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a
|
||
rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[".
|
||
*jsbterm-mouse*
|
||
jsbterm JSB term mouse handling.
|
||
*pterm-mouse*
|
||
pterm QNX pterm mouse handling.
|
||
|
||
The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
|
||
|+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
|
||
Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always
|
||
recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes
|
||
are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not
|
||
"xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict).
|
||
This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is
|
||
set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm"
|
||
or "xterm2" already. The main use of this option is to set it to
|
||
"xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
|
||
handle xterm mouse codes.
|
||
The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
|
||
95 of higher. This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
|
||
feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
|
||
xterm version number. Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly.
|
||
If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set
|
||
t_RV to an empty string: >
|
||
:set t_RV=
|
||
<
|
||
*'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'*
|
||
'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999)
|
||
global
|
||
Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines
|
||
to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is
|
||
very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number,
|
||
e.g., 3, to speed up displaying.
|
||
|
||
*'ttytype'* *'tty'*
|
||
'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM)
|
||
global
|
||
Alias for 'term', see above.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'undolevels'* *'ul'*
|
||
'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
|
||
Win32 and OS/2)
|
||
global
|
||
Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information
|
||
is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used
|
||
(nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory).
|
||
Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes
|
||
itself: >
|
||
set ul=0
|
||
<!--
|
||
< But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
|
||
'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
|
||
Set to a negative number for no undo at all: >
|
||
set ul=-1
|
||
< This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.
|
||
Also see |undo-two-ways|.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'updatecount'* *'uc'*
|
||
'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
|
||
disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
|
||
recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
|
||
Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly
|
||
mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
|
||
The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|.
|
||
When 'updatecount' is set from non-zero to zero, swap files are
|
||
created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount'
|
||
is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
|
||
Also see |'swapsync'|.
|
||
This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile"
|
||
or "nowrite".
|
||
|
||
*'updatetime'* *'ut'*
|
||
'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
|
||
written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the
|
||
|CursorHold| autocommand event.
|
||
|
||
*'verbose'* *'vbs'*
|
||
'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0)
|
||
global
|
||
When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing.
|
||
Currently, these messages are given:
|
||
>= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written.
|
||
>= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed.
|
||
>= 5 Every searched tags file.
|
||
>= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
|
||
>= 9 Every executed autocommand.
|
||
>= 12 Every executed function.
|
||
>= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
|
||
>= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
|
||
>= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters).
|
||
|
||
This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|.
|
||
This option is also set by the |:verbose| command.
|
||
|
||
*'viewdir'* *'vdir'*
|
||
'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32:
|
||
"$VIM/vimfiles/view",
|
||
for Unix: "~/.vim/view",
|
||
for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view"
|
||
for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view"
|
||
for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +mksession
|
||
feature}
|
||
Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'viewoptions'* *'vop'*
|
||
'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +mksession
|
||
feature}
|
||
Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated
|
||
list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something:
|
||
word save and restore ~
|
||
cursor cursor position in file and in window
|
||
folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
|
||
fold options
|
||
options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
|
||
global values for local options)
|
||
slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
|
||
slashes
|
||
unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
|
||
on Windows or DOS
|
||
|
||
"slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files
|
||
with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
|
||
but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
|
||
|
||
*'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528*
|
||
'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS,
|
||
Windows and OS/2: '20,"50,h,rA:,rB:,
|
||
for Amiga: '20,"50,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:
|
||
for others: '20,"50,h)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
|
||
when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). The string should be a comma
|
||
separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
|
||
identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
|
||
which specifies the value of that parameter. If a particular
|
||
character is left out, then the default value is used for that
|
||
parameter. The following is a list of the identifying characters and
|
||
the effect of their value.
|
||
CHAR VALUE ~
|
||
! When included, save and restore global variables that start
|
||
with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
|
||
letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
|
||
and "_K_L_M" are not.
|
||
" Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then
|
||
registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are
|
||
saved. Dont forget to put a backslash before the ", otherwise
|
||
it will be recognized as the start of a comment!
|
||
% When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is
|
||
started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
|
||
restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
|
||
buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Buffers
|
||
without a file name and buffers for help files are not written
|
||
to the viminfo file.
|
||
' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
|
||
are remembered. This parameter must always be included when
|
||
'viminfo' is non-empty.
|
||
Including this item also means that the |jumplist| is stored
|
||
in the viminfo file.
|
||
/ Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
|
||
saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
|
||
patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of
|
||
'history' is used.
|
||
: Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
|
||
saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
|
||
@ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
|
||
saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
|
||
c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the
|
||
'encoding' used when writing the file to the current
|
||
'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|.
|
||
f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0
|
||
to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when
|
||
non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current
|
||
cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").
|
||
h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo
|
||
file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
|
||
has been used since the last search command.
|
||
n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow
|
||
the 'n'. Must be the last one! If the "-i" argument was
|
||
given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
|
||
given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are expanded
|
||
when opening the file, not when setting the option.
|
||
r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next
|
||
','). This parameter can be given several times. Each
|
||
specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
|
||
stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you
|
||
could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". Case is
|
||
ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50
|
||
characters.
|
||
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set viminfo='50,\"1000,:0,n~/vim/viminfo
|
||
<
|
||
'50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
|
||
edited.
|
||
"1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
|
||
remembered.
|
||
:0 Command-line history will not be saved.
|
||
n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo".
|
||
no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
|
||
that is, save all of the search history, and also the
|
||
previous search and substitute patterns.
|
||
no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
|
||
no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.
|
||
|
||
This option cannot be set from a |modeline|, for security reasons.
|
||
|
||
*'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
|
||
'virtualedit' 've' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the
|
||
|+virtualedit| feature}
|
||
A comma separated list of these words:
|
||
block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
|
||
insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
|
||
all Allow virtual editing in all modes.
|
||
Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
|
||
no actual character. This can be halfway into a Tab or beyond the end
|
||
of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
|
||
editing a table.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep*
|
||
'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Use visual bell instead of beeping.
|
||
<!--
|
||
The terminal code to display the
|
||
visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted,
|
||
use ":set vb t_vb=".
|
||
Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You
|
||
might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
|
||
In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display
|
||
for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",
|
||
where 40 is the time in msec.
|
||
Also see 'errorbells'.
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'warn'* *'nowarn'*
|
||
'warn' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
|
||
has been changed.
|
||
|
||
*'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'*
|
||
'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' termcap option.
|
||
It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x.
|
||
Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and
|
||
vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running.
|
||
|
||
*'whichwrap'* *'ww'*
|
||
'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to wrap to the
|
||
previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
|
||
the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
|
||
char key mode ~
|
||
b <BS> Normal and Visual
|
||
s <Space> Normal and Visual
|
||
h "h" Normal and Visual
|
||
l "l" Normal and Visual
|
||
< <Left> Normal and Visual
|
||
> <Right> Normal and Visual
|
||
~ "~" Normal
|
||
[ <Left> Insert and Replace
|
||
] <Right> Insert and Replace
|
||
For example: >
|
||
:set ww=<,>,[,]
|
||
< allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
|
||
When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
|
||
operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h"
|
||
different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This
|
||
is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
|
||
"dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
|
||
":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
|
||
cursor.
|
||
When 'l' is included, you get a side effect: "yl" on an empty line
|
||
will include the <EOL>, so that "p" will insert a new line.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'wildchar'* *'wc'*
|
||
'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
|
||
command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
|
||
The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See
|
||
'wildcharm' for that.
|
||
Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: >
|
||
:set wc=<Esc>
|
||
< NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
||
|
||
*'wildcharm'* *'wcm'*
|
||
'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0))
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
|
||
recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line
|
||
keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally
|
||
you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that
|
||
automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: >
|
||
:set wcm=<C-Z>
|
||
:cmap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
|
||
< Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.
|
||
|
||
*'wildignore'* *'wig'*
|
||
'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
|
||
feature}
|
||
A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these
|
||
patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names.
|
||
The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
|
||
Also see 'suffixes'.
|
||
Example: >
|
||
:set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
|
||
< The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
||
a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
||
uses another default.
|
||
|
||
*'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'*
|
||
'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu|
|
||
feature}
|
||
When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
|
||
mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
|
||
the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the
|
||
first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is
|
||
one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
|
||
CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
|
||
When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is
|
||
specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode.
|
||
If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on
|
||
the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls
|
||
as needed.
|
||
The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used
|
||
for selecting a completion.
|
||
While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special
|
||
meanings:
|
||
|
||
<Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
|
||
<Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a
|
||
subdirectory or submenu.
|
||
<CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
|
||
dot: move into a submenu.
|
||
<Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into
|
||
parent directory or parent menu.
|
||
|
||
This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|.
|
||
|
||
If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead
|
||
of selecting a different match, use this: >
|
||
:cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
|
||
:cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
|
||
<
|
||
The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match
|
||
|hl-WildMenu|.
|
||
|
||
*'wildmode'* *'wim'*
|
||
'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Completion mode that is used for the character specified with
|
||
'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each
|
||
part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar. The
|
||
first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar',
|
||
The second part for the second use, etc.
|
||
These are the possible values for each part:
|
||
"" Complete only the first match.
|
||
"full" Complete the next full match. After the last match,
|
||
the original string is used and then the first match
|
||
again.
|
||
"longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't
|
||
result in a longer string, use the next part.
|
||
"longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is
|
||
enabled.
|
||
"list" When more than one match, list all matches.
|
||
"list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and
|
||
complete first match.
|
||
"list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and
|
||
complete till longest common string.
|
||
When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases.
|
||
|
||
Examples: >
|
||
:set wildmode=full
|
||
< Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) >
|
||
:set wildmode=longest,full
|
||
< Complete longest common string, then each full match >
|
||
:set wildmode=list:full
|
||
< List all matches and complete each full match >
|
||
:set wildmode=list,full
|
||
< List all matches without completing, then each full match >
|
||
:set wildmode=longest,list
|
||
< Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.
|
||
|
||
*'winaltkeys'* *'wak'*
|
||
'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu")
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI}
|
||
Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
|
||
key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
|
||
menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
|
||
entering special characters. This option tells what to do:
|
||
no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be
|
||
mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be
|
||
done with the |:simalt| command.
|
||
yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key
|
||
combinations cannot be mapped.
|
||
menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
|
||
shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other
|
||
keys can be mapped.
|
||
If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
|
||
key is never used for the menu.
|
||
In the Win32 version, the <F10> key is handled like this too, since
|
||
Windows uses it to select a menu.
|
||
|
||
*'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591*
|
||
'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +windows
|
||
feature}
|
||
Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard
|
||
minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the
|
||
current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of the
|
||
height of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
|
||
always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing.
|
||
Minimum value is 1.
|
||
The height is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
|
||
height of the current window.
|
||
'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set
|
||
the minimal height for other windows.
|
||
|
||
*'winfixheight'* *'wfh'*
|
||
'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +windows
|
||
feature}
|
||
Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
|
||
'equalalways' is set. Set by default for the |preview-window| and
|
||
|quickfix-window|.
|
||
The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
|
||
|
||
*'winminheight'* *'wmh'*
|
||
'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +windows
|
||
feature}
|
||
The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
|
||
This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
|
||
When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
|
||
status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when
|
||
they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
|
||
Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
|
||
This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
|
||
large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
|
||
windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.
|
||
|
||
*'winminwidth'* *'wmw'*
|
||
'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
||
feature}
|
||
The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
|
||
This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
|
||
When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
|
||
a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one
|
||
line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
|
||
to go.)
|
||
Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
|
||
This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
|
||
large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
|
||
windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
|
||
|
||
*'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
|
||
'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
||
feature}
|
||
Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard
|
||
minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If
|
||
the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
|
||
the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
|
||
always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing.
|
||
The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
|
||
width of the current window.
|
||
'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set
|
||
the minimal width for other windows.
|
||
|
||
*'wrap'* *'nowrap'*
|
||
'wrap' boolean (default on)
|
||
local to window
|
||
|
||
This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text
|
||
in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
|
||
When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
|
||
displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap
|
||
and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is
|
||
moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
|
||
horizontally.
|
||
The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See
|
||
'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
|
||
To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >
|
||
:set sidescroll=5
|
||
:set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
|
||
< See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
|
||
|
||
*'wrapmargin'* *'wm'*
|
||
'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0)
|
||
local to buffer
|
||
Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
|
||
starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
|
||
and inserting continues on the next line. When 'textwidth' is
|
||
non-zero, this option is not used. See also 'formatoptions' and
|
||
|ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently and less usefully}
|
||
-->
|
||
|
||
*'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'*
|
||
'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385*
|
||
global
|
||
Searches wrap around the end of the file.
|
||
|
||
<!--
|
||
*'write'* *'nowrite'*
|
||
'write' boolean (default on)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
|
||
Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
|
||
still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
|
||
argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
|
||
writing a temporary file.
|
||
|
||
*'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'*
|
||
'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off)
|
||
global
|
||
Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.
|
||
|
||
*'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'*
|
||
'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off
|
||
otherwise)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after
|
||
the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
|
||
also on. Reset this option if your file system is almost full. See
|
||
|backup-table| for another explanation.
|
||
When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
|
||
NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
|
||
set.
|
||
|
||
*'writedelay'* *'wd'*
|
||
'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0)
|
||
global
|
||
|
||
The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the
|
||
screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by
|
||
one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes.
|
||
-->
|
||
|